WO2022063265A1 - Inter-frame prediction method and apparatus - Google Patents

Inter-frame prediction method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022063265A1
WO2022063265A1 PCT/CN2021/120640 CN2021120640W WO2022063265A1 WO 2022063265 A1 WO2022063265 A1 WO 2022063265A1 CN 2021120640 W CN2021120640 W CN 2021120640W WO 2022063265 A1 WO2022063265 A1 WO 2022063265A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
motion vectors
block
reconstructed image
candidate motion
image
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/120640
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈焕浜
杨海涛
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022063265A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022063265A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/136Incoming video signal characteristics or properties
    • H04N19/137Motion inside a coding unit, e.g. average field, frame or block difference
    • H04N19/139Analysis of motion vectors, e.g. their magnitude, direction, variance or reliability
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/157Assigned coding mode, i.e. the coding mode being predefined or preselected to be further used for selection of another element or parameter
    • H04N19/159Prediction type, e.g. intra-frame, inter-frame or bidirectional frame prediction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the technical field of video or image compression based on artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI), and in particular, to an inter-frame prediction method and apparatus.
  • artificial intelligence artificial intelligence, AI
  • Video coding (video encoding and decoding) is widely used in digital video applications such as broadcast digital television, video transmission over the Internet and mobile networks, real-time conversational applications such as video chat and video conferencing, Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ) and Blu-ray Discs, video content capture and editing systems, and security applications for camcorders.
  • digital video applications such as broadcast digital television, video transmission over the Internet and mobile networks
  • real-time conversational applications such as video chat and video conferencing, Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ) and Blu-ray Discs
  • video content capture and editing systems such as camcorders.
  • Video compression devices typically use software and/or hardware on the source side to encode video data prior to transmission or storage, thereby reducing the amount of data required to represent digital video images. Then, the compressed data is received by the video decompression device at the destination side.
  • Prediction in video coding can be divided into intra-frame prediction and inter-frame prediction.
  • Inter prediction is to find a matching reference block for the current block in the current image in the reconstructed image, and use the value of the pixel point in the reference block as the predicted value of the value of the pixel point in the current block.
  • the encoder tries multiple reference blocks for the current block in the reference picture, then decides the reference block suitable for the current block, and transmits the motion information to the decoder.
  • the decoder can find the reference block of the corresponding image block through the motion information in the code stream, and then obtain the prediction of the image block.
  • the motion information includes one or two motion vectors (motion vector, MV) pointing to the reference block, and indication information of the image where the reference block is located (usually denoted as a reference frame index (reference index, RI)).
  • motion vector motion vector
  • RI reference frame index
  • two inter-frame prediction modes are defined, namely the advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode and the merge (Merge) mode.
  • AMVP advanced motion vector prediction
  • Merge merge
  • a candidate motion information list is first constructed from the motion information of the reconstructed image blocks adjacent to the current block in the spatial or temporal domains, and then the optimal motion information is determined from the candidate motion information list as the motion information of the current block. Further, the prediction of the current block is obtained based on the motion information of the current block.
  • the present application provides an inter-frame prediction method and apparatus, so as to improve the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduce the error of inter-frame prediction, and improve the RDO efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
  • the present application provides an inter-frame prediction method, comprising: acquiring motion vectors of P reconstructed image blocks in a surrounding area of a current block, where the surrounding area includes a spatial neighborhood of the current block and/or or temporal neighborhood; obtain Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q probability values corresponding to the Q a priori candidate motion vectors according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks; according to M probability values corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors, M weighting factors corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors are obtained; M, P and Q are positive integers; according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors The motion vector performs motion compensation respectively to obtain M predicted values; the predicted value of the current block is obtained by weighted summation of the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors.
  • the surrounding area of the current block includes spatial and/or temporal neighborhoods of the current block, wherein the image blocks in the spatial neighborhood may include left candidate image blocks located to the left of the current block and upper candidate image blocks located above the current block.
  • the reconstructed image block may refer to an encoded image block that has been encoded by an encoder and obtained for reconstruction, or a decoded image block that has been decoded and reconstructed by a decoder.
  • the reconstructed image block may also refer to a basic unit image block of a preset size obtained by dividing an encoded image block or a decoded image block into sizes.
  • the motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks may include: (1) multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks, the multiple posterior motion vectors are corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks or, (2) the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block, where the optimal motion vector is the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the above-mentioned multiple posterior motion vectors.
  • the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are obtained from the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. For any a priori candidate motion vector among the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, it can be offset within a preset search window to generate multiple offset candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that a priori candidate motion vector of the reconstructed image block can obtain multiple offset candidate motion vectors.
  • the multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are operated as above, and all the obtained offset candidate motion vectors are the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • the above-mentioned P reconstructed image blocks can obtain their respective multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors according to this method, which will not be described one by one here.
  • the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors; may also refer to the partial motion vectors in the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors.
  • the above-mentioned P reconstructed image blocks can obtain their respective multiple a posteriori motion vectors according to this method, and will not be described one by one here.
  • the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors.
  • Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the training engine 25 For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 below, which will not be repeated here.
  • the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block may refer to all the remaining motion vectors after deduplication of the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, or may refer to the plurality of each of the P reconstructed image blocks
  • the partial motion vector among all the remaining motion vectors after the posterior motion vector is deduplicated.
  • M Q
  • the M probability values refer to the above-mentioned Q probability values
  • the M a priori candidate motion vectors refer to the above-mentioned Q a priori candidate motion vectors.
  • the M probability values are all greater than the other probability values except the M probability values among the Q probability values, and the M probability values are selected from the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block.
  • M a priori candidate motion vectors corresponding to the value That is, the first M probability values with the largest probability value are selected from the Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and the M probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors of the current block are selected.
  • the weight factor and the prediction value are calculated based on the M probability values and the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and then the prediction value of the current block is obtained.
  • the remaining probability values except the aforementioned M probability values can be ignored because the values are small, which can reduce the amount of calculation and improve the efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
  • corresponding in the M probability values corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors does not refer to a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the current block has 5 prior candidate motion vectors, and the corresponding probabilities Values can be 5 probability values or less than 5 probability values.
  • the probability value corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector is used as the weighting factor corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of the M prior candidate motion vectors are the respective probability values of the M prior candidate motion vectors; or, when the sum of the M probability values is not 1, the M probability values are normalized ; take the normalized value of the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of the M prior candidate motion vectors are normalized values of the respective probability values of the M prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the above-mentioned first a priori candidate motion vector is only a term used for the convenience of description, and it does not refer to a specific prior candidate motion vector, but represents any one of the Q a priori candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that the sum of the M weighting factors corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors is 1.
  • a candidate motion vector can find a reference block in the reference frame of the current block, and perform inter-frame prediction on the current block according to the reference block to obtain the predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector.
  • the predicted values correspond to candidate motion vectors. Therefore, the motion compensation is respectively performed according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and M predicted values of the current block can be obtained.
  • the predicted value of the current block is obtained by weighted summation of the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors.
  • M predicted values correspond to M a priori candidate motion vectors
  • M weight factors also correspond to M a priori candidate motion vectors. Therefore, for the same prior candidate motion vector, the corresponding predicted values and weights A corresponding relationship is also established between the factors.
  • the weight factor corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector is multiplied by the predicted value, and then the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors are added to obtain the prediction of the current block. value.
  • the present application obtains multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values of the current block based on the respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and assigns the weighting factors and prediction values corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector
  • the predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors, and the predicted value of the current block obtained in this way is a combination of multiple prior candidate motion vectors. It fits the rich and changeable textures in the real world well, improves the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduces the error of inter-frame prediction, and improves the overall rate-distortion optimization (RDO) efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
  • RDO rate-distortion optimization
  • the respective related information of the P reconstructed image blocks may also be acquired.
  • the relevant information of the reconstructed image block may be a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and the plurality of prediction error values are also based on the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and a plurality of a posteriori The predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector is determined.
  • Motion compensation is respectively performed on the reconstructed image block according to a plurality of a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and a plurality of prediction values can be obtained, and the plurality of prediction values correspond to the foregoing a plurality of candidate a posteriori motion vectors.
  • the multiple prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain multiple prediction error values, and the multiple prediction error values correspond to multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors.
  • methods such as sum of absolute difference (SAD) or sum of squared difference (SSE) can be used to obtain the prediction error value corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
  • the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors refer to the multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • Multiple prediction error values of a posteriori candidate motion vector if the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to some motion vectors in the above multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the reconstructed image block is the same as the above multiple motion vectors.
  • the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the a posteriori motion vectors refer to the prediction error values corresponding to the partial motion vector selected from the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
  • the input to the neural network includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors for each of the P reconstructed image blocks and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
  • the respective related information of the P reconstructed image blocks may also be acquired.
  • the relevant information of the reconstructed image block may be a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and the plurality of probability values are also based on the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and a plurality of a posteriori candidate motions The predicted value corresponding to the vector is determined.
  • the multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
  • One is to obtain multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the above method.
  • a normalized exponential function, a linear normalization method, etc. can be used to normalize the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain the normalized values of the multiple prediction error values.
  • the normalized value of the error value is the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block.
  • the probability value can represent the probability that the posterior motion vector corresponding to it becomes the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the multiple predicted values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method into the trained neural network to obtain the reconstructed image block corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors multiple probability values.
  • the neural network reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the input to the neural network includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the P reconstructed image blocks and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of posterior motion vectors.
  • the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by the following two methods:
  • One is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the smallest prediction error value among the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the other is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the largest probability value among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the optimal motion vector in this application only refers to the motion vector obtained by one of the above two methods, which is one of the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • Motion vectors are not the only motion vectors used in inter-predicting reconstructed image blocks.
  • the posterior motion vector of the current block and its related information can be obtained immediately, and the obtaining method includes:
  • the neural network according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block to obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple probabilities corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors value, the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, or the multiple a posteriori motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple prediction error values of the current block. a probability value.
  • the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of reconstructed image blocks.
  • the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of reconstructed image blocks.
  • the plurality of reconstructed image blocks are image blocks in the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block; a neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
  • the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes the respective optimal values of the multiple reconstructed image blocks a motion vector, and a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the current block, a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors, the plurality of reconstructed image blocks being the spatial neighborhood of the current block and/or An image block in the temporal neighborhood; a neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
  • the neural network includes at least a convolution layer and an activation layer.
  • the depth of the convolution kernel of the convolution layer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64 or 128; the size of the convolution kernel in the convolution layer is 1 ⁇ 1, 3 ⁇ 3, 5 ⁇ 5 or 7 ⁇ 7.
  • the size of a convolutional layer is 3 ⁇ 3 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 10, where 3 ⁇ 3 represents the size of the convolution kernel in the convolutional layer; 2 represents the depth of the convolutional kernel included in the convolutional layer, The number of data channels input to the convolution layer is the same as the depth of the convolution kernel contained in the convolution layer, that is, the number of data channels input to the convolution layer is also 2; 10 represents the number of convolution kernels contained in the convolution layer. , the number of data channels outputting the convolution layer is the same as the number of convolution kernels contained in the convolution layer, that is, the number of data channels outputting the convolution layer is also 10.
  • the neural network includes a convolutional neural network CNN, a deep neural network DNN or a recurrent neural network RNN.
  • the present application provides an encoder, comprising a processing circuit for performing the method according to any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • the present application provides a decoder, including a processing circuit, configured to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, including program code, which, when executed on a computer or a processor, is used to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • the present application provides an encoder, comprising: one or more processors; a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processors and storing a program executed by the processors, wherein the The program, when executed by the processor, causes the decoder to execute the method described in any one of the first aspect above.
  • the present application provides a decoder comprising: one or more processors; a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processors and storing a program executed by the processors, wherein the The program, when executed by the processor, causes the encoder to execute the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • the present application provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, comprising program code, which, when executed by a computer device, is used to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • the present invention relates to an inter-frame prediction apparatus, and the beneficial effects can be referred to the description of the first aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the inter-frame prediction apparatus has the function of implementing the behavior in the method embodiment of the first aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the inter-frame prediction apparatus includes: a motion estimation unit and an inter-frame prediction processing unit, wherein the motion estimation unit is configured to acquire the respective motions of the P reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block A vector, where the surrounding area includes a spatial neighborhood and/or a temporal neighborhood of the current block; an inter-frame prediction processing unit, configured to implement the method described in any one of the first aspects.
  • These modules can perform the corresponding functions in the method examples of the first aspect. For details, please refer to the detailed descriptions in the method examples, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1a is an exemplary block diagram of a decoding system 10 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1b is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoding system 40 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is an exemplary block diagram of a video encoder 20 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoder 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoding apparatus 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is an exemplary block diagram of an apparatus 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6a-6e are several exemplary architectures of a neural network for inter-frame prediction according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a candidate image block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a process 800 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a process 900 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a search window according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a process 1100 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a process 1200 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an AI-based video compression technology, in particular a neural network-based video compression technology, and specifically provide an inter-frame prediction technology based on a neural network (NN) to improve traditional Hybrid video codec system.
  • a neural network NN
  • Video coding generally refers to the processing of sequences of images that form a video or video sequence.
  • the terms "picture”, “frame” or “image” may be used as synonyms.
  • Video encoding (or commonly referred to as encoding) includes two parts, video encoding and video decoding.
  • Video encoding is performed on the source side and typically involves processing (eg, compressing) the original video image to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video image (and thus store and/or transmit more efficiently).
  • Video decoding is performed on the destination side and typically involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video image.
  • the "encoding" of a video image in relation to the embodiments should be understood as the “encoding” or “decoding” of a video image or a video sequence.
  • the encoding part and the decoding part are also collectively referred to as codec (encoding and decoding, CODEC).
  • the original video image can be reconstructed, ie the reconstructed video image has the same quality as the original video image (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission).
  • further compression is performed through quantization, etc. to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video image, and the decoder side cannot completely reconstruct the video image, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video image is higher than that of the original video image. low or poor.
  • Video coding standards fall under the category of "lossy hybrid video codecs" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the pixel domain with 2D transform coding in the transform domain for applying quantization).
  • Each image in a video sequence is usually partitioned into sets of non-overlapping blocks, usually encoded at the block level.
  • encoders typically process i.e.
  • encode video at the block (video block) level eg, by spatial (intra) prediction and temporal (inter) prediction to generate prediction blocks; block) to subtract the prediction block to get the residual block; transform the residual block in the transform domain and quantize the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will process inversely with respect to the encoder Partially applied to encoded or compressed blocks to reconstruct the current block for representation. Additionally, the encoder needs to repeat the decoder's processing steps so that the encoder and decoder generate the same predictions (eg, intra- and inter-prediction) and/or reconstructed pixels for processing, ie, encoding subsequent blocks.
  • predictions eg, intra- and inter-prediction
  • the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 are described with respect to FIGS. 1a to 3 .
  • FIG. 1a is an exemplary block diagram of a decoding system 10 according to an embodiment of the present application, for example, a video decoding system 10 (or simply referred to as a decoding system 10 ) that can utilize the technology of the present application.
  • Video encoder 20 (or encoder 20 for short) and video decoder 30 (or decoder 30 for short) in video coding system 10 represent devices, etc. that may be used to perform techniques in accordance with the various examples described in this application .
  • the decoding system 10 includes a source device 12 for providing encoded image data 21 such as encoded images to a destination device 14 for decoding the encoded image data 21 .
  • the source device 12 includes an encoder 20 and, alternatively, an image source 16 , a preprocessor (or preprocessing unit) 18 such as an image preprocessor, and a communication interface (or communication unit) 22 .
  • Image source 16 may include or be any type of image capture device for capturing real-world images, etc., and/or any type of image generation device, such as a computer graphics processor or any type of user for generating computer animation images. Devices used to acquire and/or provide real-world images, computer-generated images (e.g., screen content, virtual reality (VR) images, and/or any combination thereof (e.g., augmented reality, AR) images).
  • the image source may be any type of memory or storage that stores any of the above-mentioned images.
  • the image (or image data) 17 may also be referred to as the original image (or original image data) 17 .
  • the preprocessor 18 is configured to receive the original image data 17 and preprocess the original image data 17 to obtain a preprocessed image (or preprocessed image data) 19 .
  • the preprocessing performed by the preprocessor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, from RGB to YCbCr), toning, or denoising. It is understood that the preprocessing unit 18 may be an optional component.
  • a video encoder (or encoder) 20 is used to receive preprocessed image data 19 and to provide encoded image data 21 (described further below with respect to Figure 2 etc.).
  • the communication interface 22 in the source device 12 can be used to: receive the encoded image data 21 and send the encoded image data 21 (or any other processed version) over the communication channel 13 to another device such as the destination device 14 or any other device for storage or rebuild directly.
  • the destination device 14 includes a decoder 30 and may additionally, alternatively, include a communication interface (or communication unit) 28 , a post-processor (or post-processing unit) 32 and a display device 34 .
  • the communication interface 28 in the destination device 14 is used to receive the encoded image data 21 (or any other processed version) directly from the source device 12 or from any other source device such as a storage device, for example, the storage device is an encoded image data storage device, The encoded image data 21 is supplied to the decoder 30 .
  • Communication interface 22 and communication interface 28 may be used through a direct communication link between source device 12 and destination device 14, such as a direct wired or wireless connection, etc., or through any type of network, such as a wired network, a wireless network, or any Combination, any type of private network and public network, or any type of combination, send or receive encoded image data (or encoded data) 21 .
  • the communication interface 22 may be used to encapsulate the encoded image data 21 into a suitable format such as a message, and/or use any type of transfer encoding or processing to process the encoded image data for transmission over a communication link or communication network transfer on.
  • the communication interface 28 corresponds to the communication interface 22 and may be used, for example, to receive transmission data and process the transmission data using any type of corresponding transmission decoding or processing and/or decapsulation to obtain encoded image data 21 .
  • Both the communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 can be configured as a one-way communication interface as indicated by the arrow from the source device 12 to the corresponding communication channel 13 of the destination device 14 in FIG. 1a, or a two-way communication interface, and can be used to send and receive messages etc. to establish a connection, acknowledge and exchange any other information related to a communication link and/or data transfer such as encoded image data transfer, etc.
  • a video decoder (or decoder) 30 is used to receive encoded image data 21 and to provide decoded image data (or decoded image data) 31 (described further below with reference to FIG. 3 etc.).
  • the post-processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded image data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed image data) such as a decoded image to obtain post-processed image data 33 such as a post-processed image.
  • Post-processing performed by post-processing unit 32 may include, for example, color format conversion (eg, from YCbCr to RGB), toning, trimming, or resampling, or any other processing used to generate decoded image data 31 for display by display device 34, etc. .
  • a display device 34 is used to receive post-processed image data 33 to display the image to a user or viewer or the like.
  • Display device 34 may be or include any type of display for representing the reconstructed image, eg, an integrated or external display screen or display.
  • the display screen may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS) display ), digital light processor (DLP), or any other type of display.
  • the decoding system 10 further comprises a training engine 25 for training the encoder 20 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the encoder 20) or the decoder 30 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the decoder 30), to process an input image or image region or image block to generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image block.
  • a training engine 25 for training the encoder 20 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the encoder 20) or the decoder 30 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the decoder 30), to process an input image or image region or image block to generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image block.
  • the training data set includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes multiple posterior motion vectors, multiple posterior motion vectors, and multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks.
  • Multiple probability values corresponding to the tested motion vector, multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and multiple reconstructed image blocks are the spatial neighborhoods of the current block and/or image patches in the temporal neighborhood.
  • a neural network is obtained after training with the training data set, and the input of the neural network is a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors.
  • the output is multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the training data set includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes multiple posterior motion vectors, multiple posterior motion vectors, and multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks.
  • Multiple prediction error values corresponding to the tested motion vector, multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and multiple reconstructed image blocks are the spatial neighbors of the current block. Image patches in the domain and/or temporal neighborhood.
  • a neural network is obtained by training the training data set, and the input of the neural network is a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and a plurality of prediction errors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors.
  • the output is multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the training data set in this embodiment of the present application includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks, and multiple image blocks of the current block.
  • a posteriori candidate motion vector, multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, multiple reconstructed image blocks are image blocks in the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block.
  • a neural network is obtained by training the training data set, the input of the neural network is the respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and the output is multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and multiple multiple probability values corresponding to a priori candidate motion vector.
  • the training data set in the embodiment of the present application includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes the reconstructed value of the image block and the predicted value corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and A plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the image block, and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
  • a neural network is obtained after training with the training data set. The input of the neural network is the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and the output is multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, and multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to the motion vector.
  • the process of training the neural network by the training engine 25 makes the outputted multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block approximate multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, and the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are approximated to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to the posterior motion vector.
  • Each training process can use a mini-batch size of 64 images and an initial learning rate of 1e-4, following a step size of 10.
  • the information of the multiple groups of image blocks may be data generated when the encoder performs inter-frame encoding on multiple current blocks.
  • the neural network can be used to implement the inter-frame prediction method provided by the embodiments of the present application, that is, the motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block and their related information are input into the neural network, and the current block can be obtained.
  • the neural network will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
  • the training data in this embodiment of the present application may be stored in a database (not shown), and the training engine 25 trains a target model based on the training data (for example, a neural network for image inter-frame prediction).
  • the training data for example, a neural network for image inter-frame prediction.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the source of the training data, for example, the training data may be obtained from the cloud or other places to perform model training.
  • the target model trained by the training engine 25 can be applied to the decoding system 10, for example, the source device 12 (eg, the encoder 20) or the destination device 14 (eg, the decoder 30) shown in FIG. 1a.
  • the training engine 25 can train on the cloud to obtain the target model, and then the decoding system 10 downloads and uses the target model from the cloud; or, the training engine 25 can train on the cloud to obtain the target model and use the target model, and the decoding system 10 directly downloads the target model from the cloud. Get the processing result.
  • the training engine 25 trains a target model with an inter-frame prediction function
  • the decoding system 10 downloads the target model from the cloud
  • the inter-frame prediction unit 244 in the encoder 20 or the inter-frame prediction unit 344 in the decoder 30 can Perform inter-frame prediction on the input image or image block according to the target model, and obtain the prediction of the image or image block.
  • the training engine 25 trains a target model with an inter-frame prediction function, and the decoding system 10 does not need to download the target model from the cloud.
  • the encoder 20 or the decoder 30 transmits the image or image block to the cloud, and the cloud passes the target model through the target model.
  • the image or image block is inter-predicted, and the prediction of the image or image block is obtained and transmitted to the encoder 20 or the decoder 30 .
  • FIG. 1a shows source device 12 and destination device 14 as separate devices
  • device embodiments may include both source device 12 and destination device 14 or the functions of both source device 12 and destination device 14, ie, include both source device 12 and destination device 14.
  • Device 12 or corresponding function and destination device 14 or corresponding function In these embodiments, source device 12 or corresponding functionality and destination device 14 or corresponding functionality may be implemented using the same hardware and/or software or by separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof.
  • the existence and (exact) division of the different units or functions in the source device 12 and/or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1a may vary depending on the actual device and application, as will be apparent to the skilled person .
  • Encoder 20 eg video encoder 20 or decoder 30 (eg video decoder 30) or both may be implemented by processing circuitry as shown in Figure 1b, eg one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, special-purpose processor for video encoding, or any combination thereof .
  • Encoder 20 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 to include the various modules discussed with reference to encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • Decoder 30 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 to include the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG.
  • the processing circuitry 46 may be used to perform various operations discussed below. As shown in FIG. 5, if parts of the techniques are implemented in software, a device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium and execute the instructions in hardware using one or more processors, thereby Implement the techniques of this application.
  • One of the video encoder 20 and the video decoder 30 may be integrated in a single device as part of a combined codec (encoder/decoder, CODEC), as shown in Figure 1b.
  • Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary device, such as a laptop or laptop, cell phone, smartphone, tablet or tablet, camera, Desktop computers, set-top boxes, televisions, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (eg, content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiving equipment, broadcast transmitting equipment, etc., and may not Use or use any type of operating system.
  • source device 12 and destination device 14 may be equipped with components for wireless communication.
  • source device 12 and destination device 14 may be wireless communication devices.
  • the video coding system 10 shown in FIG. 1a is merely exemplary, and the techniques provided herein may be applicable to video encoding settings (eg, video encoding or video decoding) that do not necessarily include encoding devices and Decode any data communication between devices.
  • data is retrieved from local storage, sent over a network, and so on.
  • the video encoding device may encode and store the data in memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve and decode the data from the memory.
  • encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but merely encode data to and/or retrieve and decode data from memory.
  • FIG. 1b is an exemplary block diagram of a video coding system 40 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video coding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, a video encoder 20, a video decoder 30 (and/or by video encoder/decoder implemented by processing circuitry 46 ), antenna 42 , one or more processors 43 , one or more memory memories 44 and/or display device 45 .
  • antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • display device 45 may be used to present video data.
  • Processing circuitry 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, graphics processors, general purpose processors, and the like.
  • Video coding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the memory memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (eg, static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile memory volatile memory (eg, flash memory, etc.), etc.
  • memory storage 44 may be implemented by cache memory.
  • processing circuitry 46 may include memory (eg, cache memory, etc.) for implementing image buffers, and the like.
  • video encoder 20 implemented by logic circuitry may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by processing circuitry 46 or memory memory 44 ) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing circuitry 46 ).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include video encoder 20 implemented by processing circuitry 46 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • Logic circuits may be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
  • video decoder 30 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 in a similar manner to implement various of the types discussed with reference to video decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein. module.
  • logic circuit-implemented video decoder 30 may include an image buffer (implemented by processing circuit 46 or memory memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing circuit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include video decoder 30 implemented by processing circuitry 46 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the encoded bitstream may include data, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc., as discussed herein related to encoded video frames, such as data related to encoded partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients). , (as discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining the encoding split).
  • Video coding system 40 may also include video decoder 30 coupled to antenna 42 for decoding the encoded bitstream.
  • Display device 45 is used to present video frames.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to perform the opposite process.
  • video decoder 30 may be operable to receive and parse such syntax elements, decoding the associated video data accordingly.
  • video encoder 20 may entropy encode the syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, video decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode related video data accordingly.
  • VVC universal video coding
  • VCEG video coding experts group
  • MPEG motion picture experts group
  • HEVC high-efficiency video coding
  • FIG. 2 is an exemplary block diagram of a video encoder 20 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video encoder 20 includes an input terminal (or input interface) 201, a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, A loop filter 220 , a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 , a mode selection unit 260 , an entropy encoding unit 270 and an output terminal (or output interface) 272 .
  • Mode selection unit 260 may include inter prediction unit 244 , intra prediction unit 254 , and partition unit 262 .
  • Inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown).
  • the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a hybrid video codec-based video encoder.
  • the inter-frame prediction unit is a trained target model (also called a neural network) for processing an input image or image region or image block to generate a predicted value for the input image block.
  • a neural network for inter prediction is used to receive an input image or image region or image patch, and generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image patch.
  • the neural network for inter prediction will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
  • the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208 and the mode selection unit 260 constitute the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop
  • the path filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, the inter-frame prediction unit 244 and the intra-frame prediction unit 254 constitute the backward signal path of the encoder, wherein the backward signal path of the encoder 20 corresponds to the decoding signal path of the decoder (see decoder 30 in Figure 3).
  • Inverse quantization unit 210 inverse transform processing unit 212 , reconstruction unit 214 , loop filter 220 , decoded image buffer 230 , inter prediction unit 244 , and intra prediction unit 254 also make up the “built-in decoder” of video encoder 20 .
  • the encoder 20 may be operable to receive images (or image data) 17, eg, images in a sequence of images forming a video or video sequence, via an input 201 or the like.
  • the received image or image data may also be a preprocessed image (or preprocessed image data) 19 .
  • image 17 may also be referred to as the current image or the image to be encoded (especially when distinguishing the current image from other images in video encoding, such as the same video sequence, i.e. the video sequence that also includes the current image, previously encoded in the post image and/or post decoded image).
  • a (digital) image is or can be viewed as a two-dimensional array or matrix of pixel points with intensity values.
  • the pixels in the array may also be called pixels or pels (short for picture elements).
  • the number of pixels in the array or image in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) determines the size and/or resolution of the image.
  • three color components are usually used, that is, an image can be represented as or include an array of three pixel points.
  • an image includes an array of corresponding red, green and blue pixel points.
  • each pixel is usually represented in a luma/chroma format or color space, such as YCbCr, including a luma component denoted by Y (and sometimes L) and two chroma components denoted by Cb and Cr.
  • the luminance (luma) component Y represents the luminance or gray level intensity (eg, both are the same in a grayscale image), while the two chrominance (chroma) components Cb and Cr represent the chrominance or color information components .
  • an image in YCbCr format includes a luminance pixel array of luminance pixel value (Y) and two chrominance pixel arrays of chrominance values (Cb and Cr).
  • Images in RGB format can be converted or transformed to YCbCr format and vice versa, the process is also known as color transformation or conversion. If the image is black and white, the image may only include an array of luminance pixels. Correspondingly, the image may be, for example, a luminance pixel array in monochrome format or a luminance pixel array and two corresponding chrominance pixel arrays in 4:2:0, 4:2:2 and 4:4:4 color formats .
  • an embodiment of the video encoder 20 may include an image segmentation unit (not shown in FIG. 2 ) for segmenting the image 17 into a plurality of (generally non-overlapping) image blocks 203 .
  • These blocks may also be referred to as root blocks, macroblocks (H.264/AVC) or coding tree blocks (CTBs), or coding tree units (CTUs) in the H.265/HEVC and VVC standards ).
  • the segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size for all images in a video sequence and use a corresponding grid that defines the block size, or to vary the block size between images or subsets of images or groups of images, and to segment each image into corresponding Piece.
  • the video encoder may be used to directly receive blocks 203 of the image 17 , eg, one, several or all of the blocks that make up the image 17 .
  • the image block 203 may also be referred to as a current image block or an image block to be encoded.
  • image block 203 is also or can be considered as a two-dimensional array or matrix of pixels with intensity values (pixel values), but image block 203 is smaller than image 17 .
  • block 203 may include an array of pixels (eg, a luminance array in the case of a monochrome image 17 or a luminance array or a chrominance array in the case of a color image) or three arrays of pixels (eg, in the case of a color image 17 ) (one luma array and two chrominance arrays) or any other number and/or type of arrays depending on the color format employed.
  • the number of pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the block 203 defines the size of the block 203 .
  • the block may be an array of M ⁇ N (M columns ⁇ N rows) pixel points, or an array of M ⁇ N transform coefficients, or the like.
  • the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the image 17 block by block, eg, performing encoding and prediction on each block 203 .
  • the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be used to segment and/or encode an image using slices (also referred to as video slices), where an image may use one or more slices (typically non-overlapping slices) ) for segmentation or encoding.
  • slices also referred to as video slices
  • Each slice may include one or more blocks (eg, Coding Tree Unit CTUs) or one or more groups of blocks (eg, coding tiles in the H.265/HEVC/VVC standard and tiles in the VVC standard ( brick).
  • the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be used to use slice/coding block groups (also referred to as video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (also referred to as video coding blocks) ) to segment and/or encode an image, wherein the image may be segmented or encoded using one or more slices/encoded block groups (usually non-overlapping), each slice/encoded block group may include one or more slices/encoded block groups A block (eg, CTU) or one or more coding blocks, etc., wherein each coding block may be rectangular or the like, and may include one or more full or partial blocks (eg, CTUs).
  • slice/coding block groups also referred to as video coding block groups
  • coding blocks also referred to as video coding blocks
  • the residual calculation unit 204 is configured to calculate the residual block 205 (the prediction block 265 will be described in detail later) according to the image block (or original block) 203 and the prediction block 265 in the following manner: for example, pixel by pixel (pixel by pixel) from the image The pixel value of the prediction block 265 is subtracted from the pixel value of the block 203 to obtain the residual block 205 in the pixel domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 is configured to perform discrete cosine transform (discrete cosine transform, DCT) or discrete sine transform (discrete sine transform, DST) etc. on the pixel point values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain.
  • Transform coefficients 207 which may also be referred to as transform residual coefficients, represent the residual block 205 in the transform domain.
  • Transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as transforms specified for H.265/HEVC. Compared to the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by some factor. In order to maintain the norm of the forward and inversely transformed residual blocks, other scaling factors are used as part of the transformation process.
  • the scaling factor is usually chosen according to certain constraints, such as the scaling factor being a power of 2 for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficients, the trade-off between accuracy and implementation cost, etc.
  • specific scaling factors are specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 at the encoder 20 side (and for the corresponding inverse transform at the decoder 30 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 312), and accordingly, can be used at the encoder
  • the 20 side specifies the corresponding scaling factor for the forward transformation through the transformation processing unit 206 .
  • the video encoder 20 (correspondingly, the transform processing unit 206 ) may be configured to output transform parameters such as the type of one or more transforms, eg, directly or after being encoded or compressed by the entropy encoding unit 270 , eg, so that video decoder 30 can receive and decode using transform parameters.
  • transform parameters such as the type of one or more transforms, eg, directly or after being encoded or compressed by the entropy encoding unit 270 , eg, so that video decoder 30 can receive and decode using transform parameters.
  • the quantization unit 208 is configured to quantize the transform coefficients 207 by, for example, scalar quantization or vector quantization, to obtain quantized transform coefficients 209 .
  • the quantized transform coefficients 209 may also be referred to as quantized residual coefficients 209 .
  • the quantization process may reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207 .
  • n-bit transform coefficients may be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m.
  • the degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP).
  • QP quantization parameter
  • QP quantization parameter
  • the quantization parameter may be an index into a predefined set of suitable quantization step sizes.
  • Quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size, and corresponding or inverse dequantization performed by the inverse quantization unit 210 or the like may include multiplying by the quantization step size.
  • Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may be used to use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size.
  • the quantization step size can be calculated from the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation of an equation involving division.
  • the video encoder 20 may be used to output a quantization parameter (QP), eg, directly or after being encoded or compressed by the entropy encoding unit 270, eg, such that the video Decoder 30 may receive and decode using the quantization parameters.
  • QP quantization parameter
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 is used to perform inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the dequantized coefficients 211, for example, perform inverse quantization with the quantization scheme performed by the quantization unit 208 according to or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208 plan.
  • Dequantized coefficients 211 may also be referred to as dequantized residual coefficients 211, corresponding to transform coefficients 207, but due to losses caused by quantization, inverse quantized coefficients 211 are usually not identical to transform coefficients.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to perform the inverse transform of the transform performed by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), to A reconstructed residual block 213 (or corresponding dequantized coefficients 213) is obtained.
  • the reconstructed residual block 213 may also be referred to as a transform block 213 .
  • the reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214 ) is used to add the transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213 ) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the pixel domain, eg, the The pixel value and the pixel value of the prediction block 265 are added.
  • the loop filter unit 220 (or “loop filter” 220 for short) is used to filter the reconstruction block 215 to obtain the filter block 221, or generally to filter the reconstructed pixels to obtain filtered pixel values.
  • loop filter units are used to smooth pixel transitions or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 220 may include one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or one or more other filters, such as self- Adaptive loop filter (ALF), noise suppression filter (NSF), or any combination.
  • the loop filter unit 220 may include a deblocking filter, a SAO filter, and an ALF filter. The order of the filtering process can be deblocking filter, SAO filter and ALF filter.
  • LMCS luma mapping with chroma scaling
  • SBT sub-block transform
  • ISP intra sub-partition
  • loop filter unit 220 is shown in FIG. 2 as a loop filter, in other configurations, loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • Filter block 221 may also be referred to as filter reconstruction block 221 .
  • video encoder 20 may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, SAO filter parameters, ALF filter parameters, or LMCS parameters), eg, directly or by entropy
  • the encoding unit 270 performs entropy encoding and outputs, eg, so that the decoder 30 can receive and decode using the same or different loop filter parameters.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for use by the video encoder 20 in encoding the video data.
  • DPB 230 may be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM), including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), Resistive RAM (RRAM) or other types of storage devices.
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • MRAM magnetoresistive RAM
  • RRAM Resistive RAM
  • Decoded image buffer 230 may be used to store one or more filter blocks 221 .
  • the decoded image buffer 230 may also be used to store other previously filtered blocks of the same current image or a different image, such as a previous reconstructed image, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide a complete previously reconstructed or decoded image (and corresponding reference blocks and pixels) and/or a partially reconstructed current image (and corresponding reference blocks and pixels), eg for inter prediction.
  • the decoded image buffer 230 may also be used to store one or more unfiltered reconstructed blocks 215, or generally unfiltered reconstructed pixels, eg, reconstructed blocks 215 not filtered by the in-loop filtering unit 220, or unfiltered Any other processed reconstructed blocks or reconstructed pixels.
  • Mode selection unit 260 includes partition unit 262, inter prediction unit 244, and intra prediction unit 254 for receiving or obtaining original blocks from decoded image buffer 230 or other buffers (eg, column buffers, not shown) 203 (current block 203 of current image 17) and original image data such as reconstructed image data, e.g. filtered and/or unfiltered reconstructed pixels or reconstructions of the same (current) image and/or one or more previously decoded images Piece.
  • the reconstructed image data is used as reference image data required for prediction such as inter prediction or intra prediction to obtain the prediction block 265 or the prediction value 265.
  • Mode selection unit 260 may be used to determine or select a partition for the current block (including no partition) and prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) to generate a corresponding prediction block 265 for computing and summing the residual block 205.
  • the reconstruction block 215 is reconstructed.
  • mode selection unit 260 may be used to select a partitioning and prediction mode (eg, from among those supported or available by mode selection unit 260) that provides the best match or the smallest residual (minimum Residual refers to better compression in transmission or storage), or provides minimal signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead refers to better compression in transmission or storage), or considers or balances both.
  • the mode selection unit 260 may be configured to determine the segmentation and prediction mode according to rate distortion optimization (RDO), ie select the prediction mode that provides the least rate distortion optimization.
  • RDO rate distortion optimization
  • partition unit 262 may be used to partition pictures in a video sequence into a sequence of coding tree units (CTUs), CTU 203 may be further partitioned into smaller block parts or sub-blocks (blocks again), e.g., Quad-tree partitioning (QT) partitioning, binary-tree partitioning (BT) partitioning, or triple-tree partitioning (TT) partitioning or any combination thereof is used by iteration, and for e.g. Or each of the sub-blocks performs prediction, wherein the mode selection includes selecting the tree structure of the partition block 203 and selecting a prediction mode to apply to each of the block parts or sub-blocks.
  • QT Quad-tree partitioning
  • BT binary-tree partitioning
  • TT triple-tree partitioning
  • segmentation e.g, performed by segmentation unit 262
  • prediction processing e.g, performed by inter-prediction unit 244 and intra-prediction unit 254
  • the partitioning unit 262 may partition (or divide) an image block (or CTU) 203 into smaller parts, such as square or rectangular shaped pieces.
  • a CTU consists of N ⁇ N luminance pixel blocks and two corresponding chrominance pixel blocks.
  • the maximum allowable size of a luma block in a CTU is specified as 128x128 in the developing universal video coding (VVC) standard, but may be specified in the future to a value other than 128x128, such as 256x256.
  • VVC developing universal video coding
  • the CTUs of a picture can be aggregated/grouped into slices/coded block groups, coded blocks or bricks.
  • a coding block covers a rectangular area of an image, and a coding block can be divided into one or more tiles.
  • a brick consists of multiple CTU lines within an encoded block.
  • An encoded block that is not divided into multiple bricks can be called a brick.
  • bricks are a true subset of coded blocks and are therefore not called coded blocks.
  • VVC supports two encoding block group modes, namely raster scan slice/encoded block group mode and rectangular slice mode.
  • raster scan coded block group mode a slice/coded block group contains a sequence of coded blocks in a raster scan of coded blocks of an image.
  • rectangular slice mode slices contain multiple tiles of an image that together make up a rectangular area of the image. The tiles within the rectangular slice are arranged in the order of the tile raster scan of the photo.
  • These smaller blocks may be further divided into smaller parts.
  • This is also known as tree splitting or hierarchical tree splitting, where a root block at root tree level 0 (hierarchy level 0, depth 0) etc. can be recursively split into two or more blocks of the next lower tree level, For example, a node at tree level 1 (hierarchy level 1, depth 1).
  • These blocks can in turn be split into two or more blocks of the next lower level, e.g. tree level 2 (hierarchy level 2, depth 2), etc., until the split ends (since ending criteria are met, such as reaching a maximum tree depth or minimum block size).
  • Blocks that are not further divided are also called leaf blocks or leaf nodes of the tree.
  • a tree divided into two parts is called a binary-tree (BT)
  • TT ternary-tree
  • QT quadtree
  • a coding tree unit may be or include a CTB for luma pixels, two corresponding CTBs for chroma pixels for an image with an array of three pixels, or a CTB for pixels for monochrome images, or a CTB using three
  • the CTB of a pixel of an image encoded by the independent color plane and syntax structure (used to encode the pixel).
  • a coding tree block can be a block of N ⁇ N pixel points, where N can be set to a certain value such that the components are divided into CTBs, which is division.
  • a coding unit may be or include a coding block of luminance pixels, two corresponding coding blocks of chrominance pixels of an image with an array of three pixel points, or a coding block of pixels of a monochrome image, or An encoding block of pixels of an image encoded using three independent color planes and syntax structures (used to encode pixels).
  • a coding block can be a block of M ⁇ N pixel points, where M and N can be set to a certain value so that the CTB is divided into coding blocks, which is division.
  • a coding tree unit may be divided into multiple CUs according to HEVC by using a quad-tree structure represented as a coding tree.
  • the decision whether to use inter (temporal) prediction or intra (spatial) prediction to encode image regions is made at the leaf-CU level.
  • Each leaf-CU may be further divided into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU partition type.
  • the same prediction process is used within a PU, and relevant information is transmitted to the decoder on a PU basis.
  • the leaf CU may be partitioned into transform units (TUs) according to other quad-tree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU.
  • VVC Versatile Video Coding
  • a combined quadtree of nested multi-type trees eg, binary and ternary trees
  • the CU can be a square or a rectangle.
  • the coding tree unit (CTU) is first divided by the quad-tree structure.
  • the quad-leaf node is further composed of multiple types of Tree structure division.
  • Multi-type leaf nodes are called A coding unit (CU), unless the CU is too large for the maximum transform length, such a segment is used for prediction and transform processing without any other partitioning. In most cases, this means that the CU, PU, and TU are The block size is the same in the coding block structure of tree-nested multi-type trees. This exception occurs when the maximum supported transform length is less than the width or height of the color components of the CU.
  • VVC has formulated a multi-type tree with quadtree nesting
  • the only signaling mechanism for partitioning information in the coding structure In the signaling mechanism, the coding tree unit (CTU) as the root of the quad-tree is first divided by the quad-tree structure. Then each quad-leaf node (when enough can be further divided into a multi-type tree structure.
  • CTU coding tree unit
  • the decoder can derive the multi-type tree division mode (MttSplitMode) of the CU based on a predefined rule or table.
  • TT division when the width or height of the luma coding block is greater than 64, TT division is not allowed .
  • the width or height of the chroma coding block is greater than 32, TT division is also not allowed.
  • the pipeline design divides the image into multiple virtual pipeline data units (VPDUs), and each VPDU is defined in the image as mutual Non-overlapping units.
  • VPDU size In hardware decoders, consecutive VPDUs are processed simultaneously in multiple pipeline stages. In most pipeline stages, VPDU size is roughly proportional to buffer size, so it is necessary to keep VPDUs small . In most hardware decoders, the VPDU size can be set to the maximum transform block (TB) size.
  • TT ternary tree
  • BT binary tree
  • the tree node block is forced to be divided until all the pixels of each coded CU are located within the image border.
  • the intra sub-partitions (ISP) tool may divide the luma intra prediction block vertically or horizontally into two or four sub-parts depending on the block size.
  • mode selection unit 260 of video encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the partitioning techniques described above.
  • video encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from a set of (predetermined) prediction modes.
  • the set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
  • the set of intra prediction modes may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes like DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined by HEVC, or may include 67 different Intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes like DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in VVC.
  • intra prediction mode of the planar mode may also be modified using a position-dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) method.
  • PDPC position-dependent intra prediction combination
  • the intra-frame prediction unit 254 is configured to generate an intra-frame prediction block 265 using reconstructed pixels of adjacent blocks of the same current image according to the intra-frame prediction mode in the intra-frame prediction mode set.
  • Intra-prediction unit 254 (or generally mode selection unit 260 ) is also used to output intra-prediction parameters (or generally information indicating the selected intra-prediction mode of the block) to entropy encoding unit 270 in the form of syntax element 266 , to be included in the encoded image data 21 so that the video decoder 30 may perform operations such as receiving and using prediction parameters for decoding.
  • the intra prediction modes in HEVC include DC prediction mode, plane prediction mode and 33 angle prediction modes, totaling 35 candidate prediction modes.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the HEVC intra prediction direction.
  • the current block can use the pixels of the reconstructed image block on the left and above as a reference for intra prediction.
  • the image block used for intra prediction of the current block in the surrounding area of the current block is called the reference block, and the pixels in the reference block are called reference pixels.
  • the DC prediction mode is suitable for the area with flat texture in the current block, and all pixels in this area use the average value of the reference pixels in the reference block as prediction;
  • the plane prediction mode is suitable for image blocks with smooth texture changes.
  • the current block that meets this condition uses the reference pixels in the reference block to perform bilinear interpolation as the prediction of all pixels in the current block; the angle prediction mode uses the texture of the current block and the texture of the adjacent reconstructed image blocks. , the value of the reference pixel in the corresponding reference block is copied along a certain angle as the prediction of all pixels in the current block.
  • the HEVC encoder selects an optimal intra prediction mode from the 35 candidate prediction modes shown in FIG. 3 for the current block, and writes the optimal intra prediction mode into the video code stream.
  • the encoder/decoder will derive 3 most probable modes from the respective optimal intra-frame prediction modes of the reconstructed image blocks using intra-frame prediction in the surrounding area.
  • the selected optimal intra prediction mode is one of the 3 most probable modes, encoding a first index indicating that the selected optimal intra prediction mode is one of the 3 most probable modes; if selected The optimal intra prediction mode is not these 3 most probable modes, then a second index is encoded to indicate that the selected optimal intra prediction mode is the other 32 modes (in the 35 candidate prediction modes, except the aforementioned 3 most probable modes other modes).
  • the HEVC standard uses a 5-bit fixed-length code as the aforementioned second index.
  • the HEVC decoder After the HEVC decoder performs entropy decoding on the code stream, it obtains the mode information of the current block.
  • the mode information includes an indicator indicating whether the optimal intra prediction mode of the current block is among the three most probable modes, and the optimal intra prediction mode of the current block.
  • the set of inter-prediction modes depends on available reference pictures (ie, eg, at least some of the previously decoded pictures previously stored in DBP 230) and other inter-prediction parameters, eg on whether to use the entire reference picture or only use a portion of the reference image, e.g. the search window area near the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or e.g. depending on whether half-pixel, quarter-pixel and/or 1/16th interpolation is performed pixel interpolation.
  • available reference pictures ie, eg, at least some of the previously decoded pictures previously stored in DBP 230
  • other inter-prediction parameters eg on whether to use the entire reference picture or only use a portion of the reference image, e.g. the search window area near the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or e.g. depending on whether half-pixel, quarter-pixel and/or 1/16th interpolation is performed pixel interpolation.
  • skip mode and/or direct mode may also be employed.
  • the merge candidate list for this mode consists of the following five candidate types in order: spatial MVP from spatially adjacent CUs, temporal MVP from collocated CUs, history-based MVP from FIFO table, pairwise Average MVP and zero MV.
  • Decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) based on bilateral matching can be used to increase the accuracy of MV for merge mode.
  • the merge mode with MVD comes from the merge mode with motion vector difference. Send the MMVD flag immediately after sending the skip flag and merge flag to specify whether the CU uses MMVD mode.
  • a CU-level adaptive motion vector resolution (AMVR) scheme may be used. AMVR supports the MVD of the CU to be encoded in different precisions.
  • the MVD of the current CU is adaptively selected.
  • a combined inter/intra prediction (CIIP) mode may be applied to the current CU.
  • a weighted average is performed on the inter and intra prediction signals to obtain the CIIP prediction.
  • the affine motion field of the block is described by motion information of 2 control points (4 parameters) or 3 control points (6 parameters) motion vectors.
  • Subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) is similar to temporal motion vector prediction (TMVP) in HEVC, but predicts the motion of sub-CUs in the current CU vector.
  • Bi-directional optical flow (BDOF), formerly known as BIO, is a simplified version that reduces computation, especially in terms of the number of multiplications and the size of the multipliers.
  • the triangular division mode the CU is evenly divided into two triangular parts in two divisions: diagonal division and anti-diagonal division.
  • the bidirectional prediction mode is extended on the basis of simple averaging to support weighted average of two prediction signals.
  • Inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit and a motion compensation (MC) unit (both not shown in FIG. 2 ).
  • the motion estimation unit may be used to receive or obtain the image block 203 (the current image block 203 of the current image 17 ) and the decoded image 231 , or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, eg, one or more other/different previously decoded images 231 .
  • Reconstruction blocks for motion estimation may include the current image and the previous decoded image 231, or in other words, the current image and the previous decoded image 231 may be part of or form a sequence of images forming the video sequence.
  • the encoder 20 may be operable to select a reference block from a plurality of reference blocks of the same or different pictures among a plurality of other pictures, and convert the reference picture (or reference picture index) and/or the position (x, y coordinates) of the reference block ) and the position of the current block (spatial offset) are provided to the motion estimation unit as inter prediction parameters.
  • This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
  • the motion compensation unit is used to obtain, eg, receive, inter-prediction parameters, and perform inter-prediction based on or using the inter-prediction parameters, resulting in the inter-prediction block 246 .
  • the motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit may involve extracting or generating prediction blocks from motion/block vectors determined through motion estimation, and may also include performing interpolation to sub-pixel precision. Interpolative filtering can generate pixels of other pixels from pixels of known pixels, thereby potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode an image block.
  • the motion compensation unit may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in one of the reference image lists.
  • the motion compensation unit may also generate block- and video slice-related syntax elements for use by video decoder 30 in decoding image blocks of the video slice.
  • coding block groups and/or coding blocks and corresponding syntax elements may be generated or used.
  • the motion vector (motion vector, MV) that can be added to the candidate motion vector list as an alternative includes the spatial phase phase of the current block.
  • the MVs of adjacent and temporally adjacent image blocks, wherein the MVs of spatially adjacent image blocks may in turn include the MVs of the left candidate image block located to the left of the current block and the MV of the upper candidate image block located above the current block.
  • FIG. 7 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a candidate image block according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG.
  • the set of candidate image blocks on the left includes ⁇ A0, A1 ⁇
  • the set of candidate image blocks on the upper side includes ⁇ B0 , B1, B2 ⁇
  • the set of temporally adjacent candidate image blocks includes ⁇ C, T ⁇
  • these three sets can be added to the candidate motion vector list as candidates, but according to the existing coding standard, AMVP's
  • the maximum length of the candidate motion vector list is 2, so it is necessary to determine the MVs for adding at most two image blocks to the candidate motion vector list from the three sets according to the specified order.
  • the order may be to give priority to the set ⁇ A0, A1 ⁇ of candidate image blocks on the left of the current block (consider A0 first, and then consider A1 when A0 is unavailable), and secondly consider the set of candidate image blocks above the current block ⁇ B0, B1, B2 ⁇ (consider B0 first, if B0 is unavailable, then consider B1, if B1 is unavailable, then consider B2), and finally consider the set ⁇ C, T ⁇ of candidate image blocks adjacent to the current block in the temporal domain (consider T first, T is unavailable) Consider C).
  • the optimal MV is determined from the candidate motion vector list through rate distortion cost (RD cost), and the candidate motion vector with the smallest RD cost is used as the motion vector predictor (motion vector) of the current block. vector predictor, MVP).
  • RD cost rate distortion cost
  • MVP motion vector predictor
  • J represents RD cost
  • SAD is the sum of absolute errors (sum of absolute differences, SAD) between the pixel value of the prediction block obtained after motion estimation using the candidate motion vector and the pixel value of the current block
  • R represents the code rate
  • denotes the Lagrange multiplier
  • the encoder transmits the determined index of the MVP in the candidate motion vector list to the decoder. Further, a motion search can be performed in the neighborhood centered on the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current block, and the encoder calculates the motion vector difference (motion vector difference, MVD) between the MVP and the actual motion vector, and uses the MVD to passed to the decoder.
  • the decoding end parses the index, finds the corresponding MVP in the candidate motion vector list according to the index, parses the MVD, and adds the MVD and the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current block.
  • the motion information that can be added to the candidate motion information list as an alternative includes the motion information of the spatially adjacent or temporally adjacent image blocks of the current block, wherein the spatial domain For adjacent image blocks and adjacent image blocks in the temporal domain, refer to Figure 7.
  • the candidate motion information corresponding to the spatial domain in the candidate motion information list comes from the 5 spatially adjacent blocks (A0, A1, B0, B1, and B2) , if the adjacent blocks in the spatial domain are unavailable or are intra-frame predictions, their motion information is not added to the candidate motion information list.
  • the candidate motion information in the temporal domain of the current block is obtained by scaling the MV of the corresponding position block in the reference frame according to the picture order count (POC) of the reference frame and the current frame.
  • POC picture order count
  • the encoder transmits the index value of the position of the optimal motion information in the candidate motion information list (denoted as merge index) to the decoder.
  • the entropy coding unit 270 is used for entropy coding algorithm or scheme (for example, variable length coding (variable length coding, VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC scheme (context adaptive VLC, CALVC), arithmetic coding scheme, binarization algorithm, Context adaptive binary arithmetic coding (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding, CABAC), syntax-based context adaptive binary arithmetic coding (syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding, SBAC), probability interval partitioning entropy (probability interval partitioning entropy, PIPE) ) coding or other entropy coding method or technique) is applied to the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements, resulting in an encoded bit stream that can be passed through output 272
  • the encoded image data 21 output in the form of 21 or the like, so that the video decoder 30 or the like can receive and use
  • video encoder 20 may be used to encode the video stream.
  • the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames.
  • encoder 20 may have quantization unit 208 and inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
  • FIG. 3 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoder 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoder 30 is adapted to receive the encoded image data 21 (eg, the encoded bitstream 21 ) encoded by the encoder 20 , for example, to obtain a decoded image 331 .
  • the encoded image data or bitstream includes information for decoding the encoded image data, such as data representing image blocks of an encoded video slice (and/or encoded block groups or encoded blocks) and associated syntax elements.
  • decoder 30 includes entropy decoding unit 304, inverse quantization unit 310, inverse transform processing unit 312, reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314), loop filter 320, decoded image buffer (DBP) ) 330 , a mode application unit 360 , an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354 .
  • Inter prediction unit 344 may be or include a motion compensation unit.
  • video decoder 30 may perform a decoding process that is substantially the inverse of the encoding process described with reference to video encoder 100 of FIG. 2 .
  • the inter prediction unit includes a trained target model (also called a neural network) for processing an input image or image region or image patch to generate predicted values for the input image patch.
  • a trained target model also called a neural network
  • a neural network for inter prediction is used to receive an input image or image region or image patch, and generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image patch.
  • the neural network for inter prediction will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 122
  • the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214
  • the loop Filter 320 may be functionally identical to loop filter 220
  • decoded image buffer 330 may be functionally identical to decoded image buffer 230 . Therefore, the explanations of the corresponding units and functions of the video encoder 20 apply correspondingly to the corresponding units and functions of the video decoder 30 .
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is used to parse the bit stream 21 (or generally the encoded image data 21 ) and perform entropy decoding on the encoded image data 21 to obtain quantization coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3 ), etc. , such as in inter prediction parameters (such as reference picture indices and motion vectors), intra prediction parameters (such as intra prediction mode or index), transform parameters, quantization parameters, loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements, etc. any or all.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 may be configured to apply a decoding algorithm or scheme corresponding to the encoding scheme of the entropy encoding unit 270 of the encoder 20 .
  • Entropy decoding unit 304 may also be used to provide inter-prediction parameters, intra-prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to mode application unit 360 , as well as other parameters to other units of decoder 30 .
  • Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice and/or video block level. In addition, or instead of slices and corresponding syntax elements, encoded block groups and/or encoded blocks and corresponding syntax elements may be received or used.
  • Inverse quantization unit 310 may be operable to receive quantization parameters (QPs) (or information related to inverse quantization in general) and quantization coefficients from encoded image data 21 (eg, parsed and/or decoded by entropy decoding unit 304), and based on The quantization parameters inverse quantize the decoded quantized coefficients 309 to obtain inverse quantized coefficients 311 , which may also be referred to as transform coefficients 311 .
  • the inverse quantization process may include using quantization parameters calculated by video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization, as well as the degree of inverse quantization that needs to be performed.
  • An inverse transform processing unit 312 may be operable to receive dequantized coefficients 311, also referred to as transform coefficients 311, and apply a transform to the dequantized coefficients 311 to obtain a reconstructed residual block 213 in the pixel domain.
  • the reconstructed residual block 213 may also be referred to as a transform block 313 .
  • the transform may be an inverse transform, such as an inverse DCT, an inverse DST, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process.
  • Inverse transform processing unit 312 may also be operable to receive transform parameters or corresponding information from encoded image data 21 (eg, parsed and/or decoded by entropy decoding unit 304 ) to determine transforms to apply to dequantized coefficients 311 .
  • the reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the reconstructed residual block 313 to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the pixel domain, for example, the pixel point values of the reconstructed residual block 313 and the prediction block 365 pixel values are added.
  • the loop filter unit 320 (in or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstruction block 315 to obtain a filter block 321, so as to smoothly perform pixel transitions or improve video quality, etc.
  • the loop filter unit 320 may include one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or one or more other filters, such as a self- Adaptive loop filter (ALF), noise suppression filter (NSF), or any combination.
  • the loop filter unit 220 may include a deblocking filter, a SAO filter, and an ALF filter. The order of the filtering process can be deblocking filter, SAO filter and ALF filter.
  • LMCS luma mapping with chroma scaling
  • SBT sub-block transform
  • ISP intra sub-partition
  • loop filter unit 320 is shown in FIG. 3 as a loop filter, in other configurations, loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the decoded video block 321 in one picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 which stores the decoded picture 331 as a reference picture for subsequent motion compensation of other pictures and/or output display respectively.
  • the decoder 30 is configured to output the decoded image 311 through the output terminal 312, etc., to display to the user or for the user to view.
  • the inter prediction unit 344 may be functionally the same as the inter prediction unit 244 (in particular, the motion compensation unit), the intra prediction unit 354 may be functionally the same as the inter prediction unit 254, and is based on the encoded image data 21 (eg, The received partitioning and/or prediction parameters or corresponding information are parsed and/or decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304 to decide the partitioning or partitioning and perform prediction.
  • the mode application unit 360 may be configured to perform prediction (intra or inter prediction) of each block according to the reconstructed image, block or corresponding pixel points (filtered or unfiltered), resulting in a prediction block 365 .
  • the intra-prediction unit 354 in the mode application unit 360 is used to generate data based on the indicated intra-prediction mode and data from previously decoded blocks of the current image.
  • an inter-prediction unit 344 eg, a motion compensation unit
  • the mode application unit 360 is used to decode the motion vector and other syntax received from the entropy decoding unit 304 according to the motion vector
  • the element generates a prediction block 365 for a video block of the current video slice.
  • these prediction blocks may be generated from one of the reference pictures in one of the reference picture lists.
  • Video decoder 30 may construct reference frame List 0 and List 1 from reference pictures stored in DPB 330 using default construction techniques.
  • slices eg, video slices
  • the same or similar process may be applied to embodiments of coding block groups (eg, video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (eg, video coding blocks),
  • video may be encoded using I, P, or B encoding block groups and/or encoding blocks.
  • Mode application unit 360 is operable to determine prediction information for a video block of the current video slice by parsing motion vectors and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate a prediction block for the current video block being decoded. For example, mode applying unit 360 uses some of the received syntax elements to determine a prediction mode (eg, intra-prediction or inter-prediction), an inter-prediction slice type (eg, B-slice, P-slice, or GPB for encoding a video block of the video slice) slice), construction information for one or more reference picture lists of the slice, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block of the slice, inter-prediction status for each inter-coded video block of the slice, other information to decode video blocks within the current video slice.
  • a prediction mode eg, intra-prediction or inter-prediction
  • an inter-prediction slice type eg, B-slice, P-slice, or GPB for encoding a video block of the video slice
  • coding block groups eg, video coding block groups
  • coding blocks eg, video coding blocks
  • video may be encoded using I, P, or B encoding block groups and/or encoding blocks.
  • the video encoder 30 of FIG. 3 may also be used to segment and/or decode an image using slices (also referred to as video slices), where an image may be performed using one or more slices (usually non-overlapping) Split or decode.
  • slices also referred to as video slices
  • Each slice may include one or more blocks (eg, CTUs) or one or more groups of blocks (eg, coded blocks in the H.265/HEVC/VVC standard and bricks in the VVC standard.
  • the video decoder 30 shown in FIG. 3 may also be used to use slice/coding block groups (also referred to as video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (also referred to as video coding blocks) ) to segment and/or decode an image, wherein the image may be segmented or decoded using one or more slices/encoded block groups (usually non-overlapping), each slice/encoded block group may include one or more A block (eg, CTU) or one or more coding blocks, etc., wherein each coding block may be rectangular or the like, and may include one or more full or partial blocks (eg, CTUs).
  • slice/coding block groups also referred to as video coding block groups
  • coding blocks also referred to as video coding blocks
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded image data 21 .
  • decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without loop filter unit 320 .
  • the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inverse quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames.
  • video decoder 30 may have inverse quantization unit 310 and inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
  • the processing result of the current step can be further processed, and then output to the next step.
  • further operations such as clip or shift operations, may be performed on the processing results of interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering.
  • the value of the motion vector is limited to a predefined range according to the representation bits of the motion vector. If the representation bit of the motion vector is bitDepth, the range is -2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1) to 2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1)-1, where " ⁇ " represents a power. For example, if bitDepth is set to 16, the range is -32768 to 32767; if bitDepth is set to 18, the range is -131072 to 131071.
  • the value of the derived motion vector (eg, the MVs of four 4x4 subblocks in an 8x8 block) is limited such that the maximum difference between the integer parts of the four 4x4 subblock MVs does not More than N pixels, eg no more than 1 pixel.
  • bitDepth There are two ways to limit motion vectors based on bitDepth.
  • embodiments of the coding system 10, encoder 20 and decoder 30, as well as other embodiments described herein, may also be used for still image processing or codecs, That is, the processing or coding of a single image in video codecs that is independent of any previous or consecutive images.
  • image processing is limited to a single image 17, inter prediction unit 244 (encoder) and inter prediction unit 344 (decoder) may not be available.
  • All other functions (also referred to as tools or techniques) of video encoder 20 and video decoder 30 are also available for still image processing, such as residual calculation 204/304, transform 206, quantization 208, inverse quantization 210/310, (inverse ) transform 212/312, partition 262/362, intra prediction 254/354 and/or loop filtering 220/320, entropy encoding 270 and entropy decoding 304.
  • FIG. 4 is an exemplary block diagram of a video coding apparatus 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the disclosed embodiments described herein.
  • the video coding apparatus 400 may be a decoder, such as the video decoder 30 in FIG. 1a, or an encoder, such as the video encoder 20 in FIG. 1a.
  • the video decoding apparatus 400 includes: an input port 410 (or input port 410) for receiving data and a receiver unit (receiver unit, Rx) 420; a processor, a logic unit or a central processing unit (central processing unit) for processing data , CPU) 430; for example, the processor 430 here can be a neural network processor 430; a transmitter unit (transmitter unit, Tx) 440 for transmitting data and an output port 450 (or output port 450); memory 460.
  • the video coding apparatus 400 may also include optical-to-electrical (OE) components and electrical-to-optical (EO) components coupled to the input port 410, the receiving unit 420, the transmitting unit 440, and the output port 450, Exit or entrance for optical or electrical signals.
  • OE optical-to-electrical
  • EO electrical-to-optical
  • the processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software.
  • Processor 430 may be implemented as one or more processor chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGAs, ASICs, and DSPs.
  • the processor 430 communicates with the ingress port 410 , the receiving unit 420 , the sending unit 440 , the egress port 450 and the memory 460 .
  • the processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (eg, a neural network-based decoding module 470).
  • the decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed above. For example, the transcoding module 470 performs, processes, prepares or provides various encoding operations.
  • decoding module 470 is implemented as instructions stored in memory 460 and executed by processor 430 .
  • Memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state drives, and may serve as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when such programs are selected for execution, and for storing instructions and data read during program execution.
  • Memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), ternary content addressable memory (ternary) content-addressable memory, TCAM) and/or static random-access memory (SRAM).
  • FIG. 5 is an exemplary block diagram of an apparatus 500 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the apparatus 500 can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1a.
  • the processor 502 in the apparatus 500 may be a central processing unit.
  • the processor 502 may be any other type of device or devices, existing or to be developed in the future, capable of manipulating or processing information.
  • the disclosed implementations may be implemented using a single processor, such as processor 502 as shown, using more than one processor is faster and more efficient.
  • the memory 504 in the apparatus 500 may be a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device may be used as memory 504 .
  • Memory 504 may include code and data 506 accessed by processor 502 via bus 512 .
  • the memory 504 may also include an operating system 508 and application programs 510 including at least one program that allows the processor 502 to perform the methods described herein.
  • applications 510 may include applications 1 through N, and also include video coding applications that perform the methods described herein.
  • Apparatus 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as display 518 .
  • display 518 may be a touch-sensitive display that combines a display with touch-sensitive elements that may be used to sense touch input.
  • Display 518 may be coupled to processor 502 through bus 512 .
  • bus 512 in device 500 is described herein as a single bus, bus 512 may include multiple buses.
  • secondary storage may be directly coupled to other components of the device 500 or accessed through a network, and may include a single integrated unit, such as a memory card, or multiple units, such as multiple memory cards. Accordingly, the apparatus 500 may have various configurations.
  • a neural network is a machine learning model.
  • a neural network can be composed of neural units.
  • a neural unit can refer to an operation unit that takes xs and intercept 1 as input.
  • the output of the operation unit can be:
  • s 1, 2,...n, n is a natural number greater than 1
  • Ws is the weight of xs
  • b is the bias of the neural unit.
  • f is the activation function of the neural unit, which is used to introduce nonlinear characteristics into the neural network to convert the input signal in the neural unit into an output signal. The output signal of this activation function can be used as the input of the next convolutional layer.
  • the activation function can be a sigmoid function.
  • a neural network is a network formed by connecting many of the above single neural units together, that is, the output of one neural unit can be the input of another neural unit.
  • the input of each neural unit can be connected with the local receptive field of the previous layer to extract the features of the local receptive field, and the local receptive field can be an area composed of several neural units.
  • Deep neural network also known as multi-layer neural network
  • DNN Deep neural network
  • the neural network inside DNN can be divided into three categories: input layer, hidden layer, and output layer.
  • the first layer is the input layer
  • the last layer is the output layer
  • the middle layers are all hidden layers.
  • the layers are fully connected, that is, any neuron in the i-th layer must be connected to any neuron in the i+1-th layer.
  • the coefficient from the kth neuron in the L-1 layer to the jth neuron in the Lth layer is defined as It should be noted that the input layer does not have a W parameter.
  • more hidden layers allow the network to better capture the complexities of the real world.
  • a model with more parameters is more complex and has a larger "capacity", which means that it can complete more complex learning tasks.
  • Training the deep neural network is the process of learning the weight matrix, and its ultimate goal is to obtain the weight matrix of all layers of the trained deep neural network (the weight matrix formed by the vectors W of many layers).
  • CNN Convolutional neural network
  • a convolutional neural network consists of a feature extractor consisting of convolutional and pooling layers. The feature extractor can be viewed as a filter, and the convolution process can be viewed as convolution with an input image or a convolutional feature map using a trainable filter.
  • the convolutional layer refers to the neuron layer in the convolutional neural network that convolves the input signal.
  • the convolution layer can include many convolution operators.
  • the convolution operator is also called the kernel. Its role in image processing is equivalent to a filter that extracts specific information from the input image matrix.
  • the convolution operator can essentially is a weight matrix, which is usually pre-defined, during the convolution operation on the image, the weight matrix is usually one pixel by one pixel (or two pixels by two pixels) along the horizontal direction on the input image... ...it depends on the value of stride) to process, so as to complete the work of extracting specific features from the image.
  • the size of the weight matrix should be related to the size of the image.
  • the depth dimension of the weight matrix is the same as the depth dimension of the input image.
  • the weight matrix will be extended to Enter the entire depth of the image. Therefore, convolution with a single weight matrix will result in a single depth dimension of the convolutional output, but in most cases a single weight matrix is not used, but multiple weight matrices of the same size (row ⁇ column) are applied, That is, multiple isotype matrices.
  • the output of each weight matrix is stacked to form the depth dimension of the convolutional image, where the dimension can be understood as determined by the "multiple" described above. Different weight matrices can be used to extract different features in the image.
  • one weight matrix is used to extract image edge information
  • another weight matrix is used to extract specific colors of the image
  • another weight matrix is used to extract unwanted noise in the image. Blur, etc.
  • the multiple weight matrices have the same size (row ⁇ column), and the size of the feature maps extracted from the multiple weight matrices with the same size is also the same, and then the multiple extracted feature maps with the same size are combined to form a convolution operation. output.
  • the weight values in these weight matrices need to be obtained through a lot of training in practical applications, and each weight matrix formed by the weight values obtained by training can be used to extract information from the input image, so that the convolutional neural network can make correct predictions.
  • the initial convolutional layer often extracts more general features, which can also be called low-level features; as the depth of the convolutional neural network deepens.
  • the features extracted by the later convolutional layers are more and more complex, such as features such as high-level semantics, and the features with higher semantics are more suitable for the problem to be solved.
  • pooling layer after the convolutional layer, which can be a convolutional layer followed by a pooling layer, or a multi-layer convolutional layer followed by a layer or multiple pooling layers.
  • the pooling layer may include an average pooling operator and/or a max pooling operator for sampling the input image to obtain a smaller size image.
  • the average pooling operator can calculate the pixel values in the image within a certain range to produce an average value as the result of average pooling.
  • the max pooling operator can take the pixel with the largest value within a specific range as the result of max pooling.
  • the operators in the pooling layer should also be related to the size of the image.
  • the size of the output image after processing by the pooling layer can be smaller than the size of the image input to the pooling layer, and each pixel in the image output by the pooling layer represents the average or maximum value of the corresponding sub-region of the image input to the pooling layer.
  • the convolutional neural network After processing by the convolutional layer/pooling layer, the convolutional neural network is not enough to output the required output information. Because as mentioned before, convolutional/pooling layers will only extract features and reduce the parameters brought by the input image. However, in order to generate the final output information (required class information or other relevant information), the convolutional neural network needs to utilize neural network layers to generate one or a set of outputs of the required number of classes. Therefore, the neural network layer may include multiple hidden layers, and the parameters contained in the multiple hidden layers may be obtained by pre-training according to the relevant training data of a specific task type. For example, the task type may include image recognition, Image classification, image super-resolution reconstruction, and more.
  • the output layer of the entire convolutional neural network which has a loss function similar to categorical cross-entropy, specifically for calculating the prediction error, once the entire volume
  • the forward propagation of the convolutional neural network is completed, and the backpropagation will start to update the weight values and biases of the aforementioned layers to reduce the loss of the convolutional neural network, and the result and ideal output of the convolutional neural network through the output layer. error between results.
  • Recurrent neural networks are used to process sequence data.
  • the layers are fully connected, and the nodes in each layer are unconnected.
  • this ordinary neural network solves many problems, it is still powerless for many problems. For example, if you want to predict the next word of a sentence, you generally need to use the previous words, because the front and rear words in a sentence are not independent. The reason why RNN is called a recurrent neural network is that the current output of a sequence is also related to the previous output.
  • RNN can process sequence data of any length.
  • the training of RNN is the same as the training of traditional CNN or DNN.
  • the error back-propagation algorithm is also used, but there is one difference: that is, if the RNN is expanded, the parameters, such as W, are shared; while the traditional neural network mentioned above is not the case.
  • the output of each step depends not only on the network of the current step, but also on the state of the network in the previous steps. This learning algorithm is called Back propagation Through Time (BPTT).
  • BPTT Back propagation Through Time
  • the convolutional neural network can use the error back propagation (BP) algorithm to correct the size of the parameters in the initial super-resolution model during the training process, so that the reconstruction error loss of the super-resolution model becomes smaller and smaller. Specifically, forwarding the input signal until the output will generate an error loss, and updating the parameters in the initial super-resolution model by back-propagating the error loss information, so that the error loss converges.
  • the back-propagation algorithm is a back-propagation motion dominated by the error loss, aiming to obtain the parameters of the optimal super-resolution model, such as the weight matrix.
  • Generative adversarial networks are deep learning models.
  • the model includes at least two modules: one module is the Generative Model, and the other is the Discriminative Model, through which the two modules learn from each other through game play to produce better output.
  • Both the generative model and the discriminative model can be neural networks, specifically, deep neural networks or convolutional neural networks.
  • the basic principle of GAN is as follows: Take the GAN that generates pictures as an example, suppose there are two networks, G (Generator) and D (Discriminator), where G is a network that generates pictures, it receives a random noise z, through this noise Generate a picture, denoted as G(z); D is a discriminant network used to determine whether a picture is "real".
  • Its input parameter is x
  • x represents a picture
  • the output D(x) represents the probability that x is a real picture. If it is 1, it means 100% of the real picture, if it is 0, it means it is impossible to be real picture.
  • the goal of generating network G is to generate real pictures as much as possible to deceive the discriminant network D
  • the goal of discriminant network D is to try to distinguish the pictures generated by G from the real pictures. Come. In this way, G and D constitute a dynamic "game” process, that is, the "confrontation" in the "generative confrontation network”.
  • the target model (also referred to as a neural network) for inter prediction will be described in detail below with reference to Figs. 6a-6e.
  • 6a-6e are several exemplary architectures of a neural network for inter-frame prediction according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the neural network includes: 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layer (3 ⁇ 3Conv), activation layer (Relu), block processing layer (Res-Block), ..., block processing layer according to the order of processing , 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers, activation layers and 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers.
  • the original matrix input to the neural network is processed by the above-mentioned layers to obtain the matrix, and then added to the original matrix to obtain the final output matrix.
  • the neural network includes, in order of processing: two 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers and activation layers, one block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layer, and activation layer and 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers.
  • the first matrix passes through a 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer and an activation layer
  • the second matrix passes through another 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer and an activation layer
  • the processed two matrices are merged (contact) and then passed through the block processing layer, ...
  • the matrix obtained after the block processing layer, the 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layer, the activation layer and the 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layer is added to the first matrix to obtain the final output matrix.
  • the neural network includes, in order of processing: two 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers and activation layers, one block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layer, and activation layer and 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers.
  • the first matrix and the second matrix are multiplied before they are input to the neural network, and then the first matrix is passed through a 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer and an activation layer, and the multiplied matrix is passed through another 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer.
  • the activation layer the two processed matrices are added and then processed by the block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer, activation layer and 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer.
  • a matrix is added to get the final output matrix.
  • the above-mentioned block processing layers include: 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers, activation layers and 3 ⁇ 3 convolutional layers in order of processing. After the input matrix is processed by these three layers, the processed The resulting matrix is added to the initial input matrix to obtain the output matrix.
  • the above-mentioned block processing layers include, in order of processing, a 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer, an activation layer, a 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer, and an activation layer. The input matrix is passed through the 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer, After the activation layer and the 3 ⁇ 3 convolution layer are processed, the matrix obtained after processing is added to the initial input matrix, and then the output matrix is obtained through an activation layer.
  • Figures 6a-6e only show several exemplary architectures of the neural network used for inter-frame prediction in the embodiments of the present application, which do not constitute a limitation on the architecture of the neural network.
  • the number of layers, layer structure, addition, multiplication, or merging, etc. included in the process, as well as the number and size of input and/or output matrices, can be determined according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a process 800 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Process 800 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 .
  • Process 800 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 800 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 8 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 800 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block.
  • Process 800 may include:
  • Step 801 Acquire respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block.
  • the surrounding area of the current block includes spatial and/or temporal neighborhoods of the current block, wherein the image blocks in the spatial neighborhood may include left candidate image blocks located to the left of the current block and upper candidate image blocks located above the current block.
  • the set of candidate image blocks on the left includes ⁇ A0, A1 ⁇
  • the set of candidate image blocks on the upper side includes ⁇ B0, B1, B2 ⁇
  • the set of temporally adjacent candidate image blocks includes ⁇ C, T ⁇ .
  • the reconstructed image block may refer to an encoded image block that has been encoded by an encoder and obtained for reconstruction, or a decoded image block that has been decoded and reconstructed by a decoder.
  • the reconstructed image block may also refer to a basic unit image block of a preset size obtained by dividing an encoded image block or a decoded image block into sizes.
  • the size of the encoded image block or the decoded image block may be 16 ⁇ 16, 64 ⁇ 64 or 32 ⁇ 16, and the size of the basic unit image block may be 4 ⁇ 4 or 8 ⁇ 8.
  • the reconstructed image block may be any one of a plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area, and other reconstructed image blocks may refer to this method.
  • the motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks may include: (1) multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks, the multiple posterior motion vectors are corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks or, (2) the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block, where the optimal motion vector is the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the above-mentioned multiple posterior motion vectors.
  • the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors are obtained from multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. For any a priori candidate motion vector among the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, it can be Offset is performed within a preset search window to generate multiple offset candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that a priori candidate motion vector of the reconstructed image block can obtain multiple offset candidate motion vectors.
  • the multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are operated as above, and all the obtained offset candidate motion vectors are the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • FIG. 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a search window according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG.
  • the prior candidate motion vector is (0, 0).
  • the vector is offset within a 3 ⁇ 3 search window, and 9 offset candidate motion vectors can be obtained: (-1,-1), (-1,0), (-1,1), (0,- 1), (0,0), (0,1), (1,-1), (1,0), (1,1).
  • the nine offset candidate motion vectors are multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors; may also refer to the partial motion vectors in the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors.
  • the probability values or prediction error values of a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors may be described below.
  • related information of the reconstructed image block can also be acquired, and the related information and its acquisition method are as follows:
  • Multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and multiple prediction error values are also determined according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors .
  • Motion compensation is respectively performed on the reconstructed image block according to the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, and multiple predicted values can be obtained, and the multiple predicted values correspond to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
  • the multiple prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain multiple prediction error values, and the multiple prediction error values correspond to multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors.
  • methods such as sum of absolute difference (SAD) or sum of squared difference (SSE) can be used to obtain the prediction error value corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
  • the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors refer to the multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
  • Multiple prediction error values of a posteriori candidate motion vector if the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to some motion vectors in the above multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the reconstructed image block is the same as the above multiple motion vectors.
  • the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the a posteriori motion vectors refer to the prediction error values corresponding to the partial motion vector selected from the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
  • Multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and multiple probability values are also determined according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
  • the multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
  • One is to obtain multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method.
  • a normalized exponential function, a linear normalization method, etc. can be used to normalize the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain the normalized values of the multiple prediction error values.
  • the normalized value of the error value is the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block.
  • the probability value can represent the probability that the posterior motion vector corresponding to it becomes the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the multiple predicted values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method into the trained neural network to obtain the reconstructed image block corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors multiple probability values.
  • the neural network reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by the following two methods:
  • One is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the smallest prediction error value among the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the other is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the largest probability value among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
  • the above-mentioned motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by directly reading the memory.
  • the above method can be used immediately to obtain the motion vector or motion vector of the reconstructed image block and its related information, and then store it for subsequent image blocks (current block).
  • current block During inter-frame prediction, it can be directly read from the corresponding location in the memory. In this way, the inter prediction efficiency of the current block can be improved.
  • the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can also be calculated only when the current block is inter-frame prediction, that is, when the current block is inter-frame prediction, the above method is used to obtain the reconstructed image block.
  • the motion vector or motion vector of the image block and its related information In this way, the calculation is performed after determining which reconstructed image block needs to be used, which can save storage space.
  • the above-mentioned method can be used to obtain the motion vectors or motion vectors and related information of the multiple reconstructed image blocks. If some image blocks in the plurality of reconstructed image blocks do not use inter-frame prediction in the process of encoding or decoding, the motion vector or motion of the partial image block can also be obtained according to any one of the methods described in the above three cases. vector and its related information.
  • the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be taken as the motion vector or motion vector and related information of all the basic unit image blocks contained in the reconstructed image block . Further, the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be refined to be the motion vector or motion vector and related information of all the pixels contained therein.
  • Step 802 Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to the respective motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks.
  • the multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block may refer to all the remaining motion vectors after deduplication of the multiple posterior motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks, or may refer to the multiple reconstructed image blocks.
  • the partial motion vector among all the remaining motion vectors after the posterior motion vector is deduplicated.
  • the respective motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the neural network reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • multiple a posteriori motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors can be input into a trained neural network to obtain multiple priors of the current block.
  • a candidate motion vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors can be input into a trained neural network to obtain multiple priors of the current block.
  • multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidates for the current block.
  • the optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into a trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors. .
  • Step 803 Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector is used as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of multiple prior candidate motion vectors are the respective probability values of multiple prior candidate motion vectors; or, when the sum of multiple probability values is not 1, the multiple probability values are normalized ; take the normalized value of the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weighting factors of the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are normalized values of the respective probability values of the multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the above-mentioned first a priori candidate motion vector is any one of a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that the sum of multiple weighting factors corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors is 1.
  • Step 804 Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
  • a candidate motion vector can find a reference block in the reference frame of the current block, and perform inter-frame prediction on the current block according to the reference block to obtain the predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector.
  • the predicted values correspond to candidate motion vectors. Therefore, the motion compensation is respectively performed according to the multiple a priori candidate motion vectors, and multiple predicted values of the current block can be obtained.
  • Step 805 Obtain the prediction value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values.
  • the present application obtains multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values of the current block based on the respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and assigns the weighting factors and prediction values corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector
  • the predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors, and the predicted value of the current block obtained in this way is a combination of multiple prior candidate motion vectors. It fits the rich and changeable textures in the real world well, improves the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduces the error of inter-frame prediction, and improves the overall rate-distortion optimization (RDO) efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
  • RDO rate-distortion optimization
  • the motion vector of the current block and its related information can be obtained immediately.
  • the motion vector and its related information refer to step 801, and the obtaining method includes:
  • the neural network according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block to obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple probabilities corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors value, the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, or the multiple a posteriori motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple prediction error values of the current block. a probability value.
  • the multiple probability values of the current block include M probability values, and the M probability values are all greater than other probability values except the M probability values among the multiple probability values of the current block. Therefore, M a priori candidate motion vectors corresponding to M probability values can be selected from multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, and then M weighting factors can be obtained according to the M probability values, and M a priori candidate motion vectors can be obtained according to the M probability values. Perform motion compensation respectively to obtain M predicted values of the current block, and finally obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of the M weighting factors and the M predicted values.
  • the top M probability values with the largest probability value are selected from the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and the M probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block are selected.
  • the weight factor and the prediction value are calculated based on the M probability values and the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and then the prediction value of the current block is obtained.
  • the remaining probability values except the aforementioned M probability values can be ignored because the values are small, which can reduce the amount of calculation and improve the efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
  • multiple prior candidate motions of the current block are determined according to multiple a posteriori motion vectors of each of the multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a process 900 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Process 900 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 .
  • Process 900 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 900 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 9 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 900 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block.
  • Process 900 may include:
  • Step 901 Acquire a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
  • the following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example.
  • the reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
  • Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain multiple posteriors.
  • N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors there are N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors in the reconstructed image block.
  • the N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors are obtained according to a plurality of prior candidate motion vectors in the reconstructed image block.
  • Motion compensation is performed respectively according to the N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors, and N4 predicted values of the reconstructed image block can be obtained.
  • the N4 predicted values correspond to the N4 posterior candidate motion vectors, that is, according to one posterior candidate motion vector Perform inter-frame prediction on the reconstructed image block by using the reference block of , to obtain a predicted value of the reconstructed image block.
  • the N4 prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block, and N4 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block are obtained, and the N4 prediction error values correspond to the N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors.
  • the present application may adopt methods such as SAD or SSE to obtain the prediction error value of the reconstructed image block corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
  • the N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors; it may also refer to a partial motion vector in the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors.
  • the number of prediction error values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block is also N2.
  • the n indicates the posterior motion vector.
  • the n indicates the prediction error value corresponding to the posterior motion vector.
  • Step 902 Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block according to multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple prediction error values corresponding to the candidate motion vectors are checked.
  • the present application can input all prediction error values and all posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks, that is, the above two N2 ⁇ Q two-dimensional matrices, into a trained neural network, and the neural network outputs multiple A priori candidate motion vectors and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors.
  • the neural network reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Multiple prediction error values of the current block corresponding to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors can also be represented as an N1 ⁇ S two-dimensional matrix.
  • the probability that the a priori candidate motion vector indicated by n of a unit image block or pixel becomes the optimal motion vector for this basic unit image block or pixel.
  • N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l is 1.
  • you can also Using integer expression you can get 256 with The integer value associated with the number of binary bits, which represents The integer value of is represented in 8 bits, so It can also be equal to 128 or 512 etc.
  • Step 903 Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple prediction error values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • weighting factors corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block can also be represented as an N1 ⁇ S two-dimensional matrix.
  • the N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l in the current block are normalized, that is, Then the N1 probability values can be used as the N1 weighting factors corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors, for example If the N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l in the current block are not normalized, the N1 probability values may be normalized first, The normalized values of the N1 probability values are then used as N1 weighting factors corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors. Therefore, with l unchanged,
  • Step 904 Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
  • a certain prior candidate motion vector is taken as an example for description.
  • the prior candidate motion vector is any one of a plurality of prior candidate motion vectors, and other prior candidate motion vectors may refer to this method.
  • a prediction value of the current block is obtained by performing motion compensation according to the prior candidate motion vector, so N1 prediction values can be obtained from N1 prior candidate motion vectors.
  • Step 905 Obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of the multiple weighting factors and the multiple predicted values.
  • the predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the weight factor corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector and the predicted value, and then adding up multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • the predicted value of the pixel in the i-th row and the j-th column in the basic unit image block indicated by l can be expressed as:
  • multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block are determined according to multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area. and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a process 1100 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Process 1100 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 .
  • Process 1100 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 1100 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 11 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 1100 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block.
  • Process 1100 may include:
  • Step 1101 Acquire a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors for each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
  • Step 1101 of this embodiment is different from step 901 of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors.
  • the following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example.
  • the reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
  • Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain multiple posteriors.
  • the N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by referring to the method in the above step 901, and details are not repeated here.
  • N2 probability values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
  • One is to obtain N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first embodiment.
  • the following normalized exponential function can be used to convert to
  • the linear normalization method can be used to convert to
  • the other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the N2 predicted values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors into the trained neural network to obtain N2 probabilities corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block value.
  • the neural network reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block can be obtained after encoding the reconstructed image block, and the N2 predicted values corresponding to the N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by referring to the method in the above step 901. Repeat.
  • the n indicates the posterior motion vector.
  • Step 1102 Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors and multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block according to multiple posterior motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to candidate motion vectors.
  • Step 1102 of this embodiment is different from step 902 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the difference is that the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors input to the neural network become multiple multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. probability value.
  • Step 1103 Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • Step 1104 Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
  • Step 1105 Obtain the prediction value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values.
  • steps 1103-1105 in this embodiment reference may be made to steps 903-905 in Embodiment 1, and details are not repeated here.
  • multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are determined.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a process 1200 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Process 1200 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 .
  • Process 1200 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 1200 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 12 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 1200 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block.
  • Process 1200 may include:
  • Step 1201 Obtain the respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
  • Step 1201 of this embodiment is different from step 901 of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become optimal motion vectors.
  • the following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example.
  • the reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
  • Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain the optimal motion vector. .
  • the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
  • One is to obtain the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first embodiment, that is, the minimum prediction error value corresponding to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block.
  • the posterior motion vector serves as the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
  • the other is to obtain the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the second embodiment, that is, the posterior corresponding to the largest probability value among the N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block
  • the motion vector serves as the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
  • Step 1202 Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to the respective optimal motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks.
  • Step 1202 of this embodiment is different from step 902 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the difference is that the multiple posterior motion vectors input to the neural network and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become multiple reconstructed The optimal motion vector for the image block.
  • Step 1203 Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
  • Step 1204 Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
  • Step 1205 Obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple predicted values.
  • steps 1203-1205 in this embodiment reference may be made to steps 903-905 in the first embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 includes: a motion estimation unit 1301 and an inter-frame prediction processing unit 1302, wherein the motion estimation unit 1301 is configured to obtain the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block.
  • the region includes the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block; the inter prediction processing unit 1302 is configured to obtain Q a priori candidate motions of the current block according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks vector and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors; according to the M probability values corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors, M corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors are obtained Weight factor; M, P, and Q are positive integers, and M is less than or equal to Q; respectively perform motion compensation according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors to obtain M predicted values; according to the M predicted values and the corresponding The M weighting factors are weighted and summed to obtain the predicted value of the current block.
  • the inter prediction apparatus 1300 including the motion estimation unit 1301 and the inter prediction processing unit 1302 may correspond to the inter prediction unit 244 in FIG. 2 , or to the inter prediction unit 344 in FIG. 3 .
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware coding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the coding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory mentioned in the above embodiments may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides an inter-frame prediction method and related apparatus. The invention relates to the technical field of artificial intelligence (AI)-based video or image compression, and specifically relates to the technical field of neural network-based video compression, said method comprising: obtaining the motion vectors of each of P reconstructed image blocks in a surrounding area of a current block; according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, obtaining Q prior candidate motion vectors and Q probability values of the current block; according to M probability values corresponding to M prior candidate motion vectors, obtaining M weight factors corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors; M, P, and Q are positive integers; according to the M prior candidate motion vectors, performing motion compensation to obtain M predicted values, respectively; performing weighted summation according to the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors to obtain a predicted value of the current block. The present application improves the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduces the error in inter-frame prediction, and improves RDO efficiency for inter-frame prediction.

Description

帧间预测方法及装置Inter prediction method and device
本申请要求于2020年9月28日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011043942.X、申请名称为“帧间预测方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202011043942.X and the application name "Inter-frame prediction method and device" filed with the Chinese Patent Office on September 28, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及基于人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)的视频或图像压缩技术领域,尤其涉及一种帧间预测方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the technical field of video or image compression based on artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI), and in particular, to an inter-frame prediction method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
视频编码(视频编码和解码)广泛用于数字视频应用,例如广播数字电视、互联网和移动网络上的视频传输、视频聊天和视频会议等实时会话应用、数字多功能影音光盘(Digital Versatile Disc,DVD)和蓝光光盘、视频内容采集和编辑系统以及可携式摄像机的安全应用。Video coding (video encoding and decoding) is widely used in digital video applications such as broadcast digital television, video transmission over the Internet and mobile networks, real-time conversational applications such as video chat and video conferencing, Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ) and Blu-ray Discs, video content capture and editing systems, and security applications for camcorders.
即使在影片较短的情况下也需要对大量的视频数据进行描述,当数据要在带宽容量受限的网络中发送或以其它方式传输时,这样可能会造成困难。因此,视频数据通常要先压缩然后在现代电信网络中传输。由于内存资源可能有限,当在存储设备上存储视频时,视频的大小也可能成为问题。视频压缩设备通常在信源侧使用软件和/或硬件,以在传输或存储之前对视频数据进行编码,从而减少用来表示数字视频图像所需的数据量。然后,压缩的数据在目的地侧由视频解压缩设备接收。在有限的网络资源以及对更高视频质量的需求不断增长的情况下,需要改进压缩和解压缩技术,这些改进的技术能够提高压缩率而几乎不影响图像质量。The large amount of video data that needs to be described even in the case of short films can create difficulties when the data is to be sent or otherwise transmitted over a network with limited bandwidth capacity. Therefore, video data is usually compressed before being transmitted in modern telecommunication networks. Since memory resources can be limited, the size of the video can also be an issue when storing the video on a storage device. Video compression devices typically use software and/or hardware on the source side to encode video data prior to transmission or storage, thereby reducing the amount of data required to represent digital video images. Then, the compressed data is received by the video decompression device at the destination side. With limited network resources and growing demand for higher video quality, there is a need for improved compression and decompression techniques that can increase compression ratios with little impact on image quality.
视频编码中的预测可以分为帧内预测和帧间预测。帧间预测是在已重建的图像中,为当前图像中的当前块寻找匹配的参考块,将参考块中的像素点的值作为当前块中的像素点的值的预测值。编码器在参考图像中为当前块尝试多个参考块,然后决策出适合当前块的参考块,并传输运动信息到解码器。解码器通过码流中的运动信息,即可找到对应图像块的参考块,进而得到该图像块的预测。运动信息包括了一个或两个指向参考块的运动矢量(motion vector,MV),以及参考块所在图像的指示信息(通常记为参考帧索引(reference index,RI))。在高效率视频编码(high efficiency video coding,HEVC)标准中,定义了两种帧间预测模式,分别为先进的运动矢量预测(advanced motion vector prediction,AMVP)模式和融合(Merge)模式。这两种模式均为先通过当前块的空域或时域相邻的已重建图像块的运动信息构建候选运动信息列表,然后从候选运动信息列表中确定最优运动信息作为当前块的运动信息,进而基于当前块的运动信息获取当前块的预测。Prediction in video coding can be divided into intra-frame prediction and inter-frame prediction. Inter prediction is to find a matching reference block for the current block in the current image in the reconstructed image, and use the value of the pixel point in the reference block as the predicted value of the value of the pixel point in the current block. The encoder tries multiple reference blocks for the current block in the reference picture, then decides the reference block suitable for the current block, and transmits the motion information to the decoder. The decoder can find the reference block of the corresponding image block through the motion information in the code stream, and then obtain the prediction of the image block. The motion information includes one or two motion vectors (motion vector, MV) pointing to the reference block, and indication information of the image where the reference block is located (usually denoted as a reference frame index (reference index, RI)). In the high efficiency video coding (HEVC) standard, two inter-frame prediction modes are defined, namely the advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode and the merge (Merge) mode. In both modes, a candidate motion information list is first constructed from the motion information of the reconstructed image blocks adjacent to the current block in the spatial or temporal domains, and then the optimal motion information is determined from the candidate motion information list as the motion information of the current block. Further, the prediction of the current block is obtained based on the motion information of the current block.
因此如何根据多个候选运动信息获取当前块的预测是实现帧间预测的关键。Therefore, how to obtain the prediction of the current block according to the multiple candidate motion information is the key to realize the inter prediction.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种帧间预测方法及装置,以提升帧间预测的准确度,减小帧间预测的误差,改善帧间预测的RDO效率。The present application provides an inter-frame prediction method and apparatus, so as to improve the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduce the error of inter-frame prediction, and improve the RDO efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
第一方面,本申请提供一种帧间预测方法,包括:获取当前块的周边区域中的P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量,所述周边区域包括所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域;根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;根据与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个概率值,得到与所述M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个权重因子;M、P和Q为正整数;根据所述M个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到M个预测值;根据所述M个预测值和对应的所述M个权重因子加权求和得到所述当前块的预测值。In a first aspect, the present application provides an inter-frame prediction method, comprising: acquiring motion vectors of P reconstructed image blocks in a surrounding area of a current block, where the surrounding area includes a spatial neighborhood of the current block and/or or temporal neighborhood; obtain Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q probability values corresponding to the Q a priori candidate motion vectors according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks; according to M probability values corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors, M weighting factors corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors are obtained; M, P and Q are positive integers; according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors The motion vector performs motion compensation respectively to obtain M predicted values; the predicted value of the current block is obtained by weighted summation of the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors.
当前块的周边区域包括当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域,其中空间邻域的图像块可以包括位于当前块左侧的左方候选图像块和位于当前块上方的上方候选图像块。The surrounding area of the current block includes spatial and/or temporal neighborhoods of the current block, wherein the image blocks in the spatial neighborhood may include left candidate image blocks located to the left of the current block and upper candidate image blocks located above the current block.
已重建图像块可以是指编码端已经编码并获取其重建的编码图像块或者解码端已解码重构的解码图像块。已重建图像块也可以是指将编码图像块或解码图像块等大小划分而来的预设大小的基本单元图像块。The reconstructed image block may refer to an encoded image block that has been encoded by an encoder and obtained for reconstruction, or a decoded image block that has been decoded and reconstructed by a decoder. The reconstructed image block may also refer to a basic unit image block of a preset size obtained by dividing an encoded image block or a decoded image block into sizes.
已重建图像块的运动矢量可以包括:(1)已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量,该多个后验运动矢量是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的;或者,(2)已重建图像块的最优运动矢量,该最优运动矢量是上述多个后验运动矢量中概率值最大或预测误差值最小的后验运动矢量。The motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks may include: (1) multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks, the multiple posterior motion vectors are corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks or, (2) the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block, where the optimal motion vector is the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the above-mentioned multiple posterior motion vectors.
已重建图像块的多个后验候选运动矢量是根据该已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的。针对已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个先验候选运动矢量,可以让其在一个预设的搜索窗口内进行偏移,生成多个偏移候选运动矢量。可见,已重建图像块的一个先验候选运动矢量可以得到多个偏移候选运动矢量。已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量,均按上述操作,得到的所有偏移候选运动矢量即为已重建图想块的多个后验候选运动矢量。上述P个已重建图像块均可按照该方法获取各自的多个后验候选运动矢量,此处不再逐一描述。The multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are obtained from the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. For any a priori candidate motion vector among the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, it can be offset within a preset search window to generate multiple offset candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that a priori candidate motion vector of the reconstructed image block can obtain multiple offset candidate motion vectors. The multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are operated as above, and all the obtained offset candidate motion vectors are the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. The above-mentioned P reconstructed image blocks can obtain their respective multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors according to this method, which will not be described one by one here.
已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量可以是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量;也可以是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量中的部分运动矢量,例如上述多个后验候选运动矢量中选出的多个指定的运动矢量。上述P个已重建图像块均可按照该方法获取各自的多个后验运动矢量,此处不再逐一描述。The multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors; may also refer to the partial motion vectors in the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors. The above-mentioned P reconstructed image blocks can obtain their respective multiple a posteriori motion vectors according to this method, and will not be described one by one here.
可以将P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量输入经训练的神经网络得到当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值。该神经网络可以参照下文训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 below, which will not be repeated here.
当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量可以是指P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量去重后剩余的所有运动矢量,也可以是指P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量去重后剩余的所有运动矢量中的部分运动矢量。The Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block may refer to all the remaining motion vectors after deduplication of the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, or may refer to the plurality of each of the P reconstructed image blocks The partial motion vector among all the remaining motion vectors after the posterior motion vector is deduplicated.
可选的,M=Q,此时M个概率值是指上述Q个概率值,M个先验候选运动矢量是指上述Q个先验候选运动矢量。Optionally, M=Q, in this case, the M probability values refer to the above-mentioned Q probability values, and the M a priori candidate motion vectors refer to the above-mentioned Q a priori candidate motion vectors.
可选的,M<Q,此时M个概率值均大于Q个概率值中除M个概率值外的其他概率值,从当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量中选取与该M个概率值对应的M个先验候选运动矢量。即从当前块的与Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值中选取概率值最大的前M个概率值,并从当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量中选取与M个概率值对应的M个先 验候选运动矢量,基于M个概率值和M个先验候选运动矢量进行权重因子和预测值的计算,进而得到当前块的预测值。而与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值中除前述M个概率值外的其余概率值,由于值较小可以忽略,这样可以减少计算量,提高帧间预测的效率。Optionally, M<Q, in this case, the M probability values are all greater than the other probability values except the M probability values among the Q probability values, and the M probability values are selected from the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block. M a priori candidate motion vectors corresponding to the value. That is, the first M probability values with the largest probability value are selected from the Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and the M probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors of the current block are selected. For the corresponding M a priori candidate motion vectors, the weight factor and the prediction value are calculated based on the M probability values and the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and then the prediction value of the current block is obtained. Among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors, the remaining probability values except the aforementioned M probability values can be ignored because the values are small, which can reduce the amount of calculation and improve the efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
需要说明的是,与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个概率值中的“对应的”不是指一一对应,例如,当前块有5个先验候选运动矢量,与其对应的多个概率值可以是5个概率值,也可以是少于5个概率值。It should be noted that "corresponding" in the M probability values corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors does not refer to a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the current block has 5 prior candidate motion vectors, and the corresponding probabilities Values can be 5 probability values or less than 5 probability values.
当M个概率值之和为1时,将与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的概率值作为与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的权重因子。即M个先验候选运动矢量各自的权重因子,是M个先验候选运动矢量各自的概率值;或者,当M个概率值之和不为1时,对M个概率值进行归一化处理;将与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的概率值的归一化值作为与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的权重因子。即M个先验候选运动矢量各自的权重因子,是M个先验候选运动矢量各自的概率值的归一化值。上述第一先验候选运动矢量只是为了便于描述而采用的一个名词,其并非指特定的先验候选运动矢量,代表是Q个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个。可见,与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个权重因子之和为1。When the sum of the M probability values is 1, the probability value corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector is used as the weighting factor corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of the M prior candidate motion vectors are the respective probability values of the M prior candidate motion vectors; or, when the sum of the M probability values is not 1, the M probability values are normalized ; take the normalized value of the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of the M prior candidate motion vectors are normalized values of the respective probability values of the M prior candidate motion vectors. The above-mentioned first a priori candidate motion vector is only a term used for the convenience of description, and it does not refer to a specific prior candidate motion vector, but represents any one of the Q a priori candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that the sum of the M weighting factors corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors is 1.
根据帧间预测的原理,一个候选运动矢量可以在当前块的参考帧中找到一个参考块,根据该参考块对当前块进行帧间预测得到对应于该候选运动矢量的预测值,可见当前块的预测值对应于候选运动矢量。因此根据M个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿,可以得到当前块的M个预测值。According to the principle of inter-frame prediction, a candidate motion vector can find a reference block in the reference frame of the current block, and perform inter-frame prediction on the current block according to the reference block to obtain the predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector. The predicted values correspond to candidate motion vectors. Therefore, the motion compensation is respectively performed according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and M predicted values of the current block can be obtained.
根据M个预测值和对应的M个权重因子加权求和得到当前块的预测值。如上所述,M个预测值和M个先验候选运动矢量对应,M个权重因子也和M个先验候选运动矢量对应,因此针对同一个先验候选运动矢量,其对应的预测值和权重因子之间也建立起对应关系,将对应于同一个先验候选运动矢量的权重因子和预测值相乘,再将对应于多个先验候选运动矢量的多个乘积相加得到当前块的预测值。The predicted value of the current block is obtained by weighted summation of the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors. As mentioned above, M predicted values correspond to M a priori candidate motion vectors, and M weight factors also correspond to M a priori candidate motion vectors. Therefore, for the same prior candidate motion vector, the corresponding predicted values and weights A corresponding relationship is also established between the factors. The weight factor corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector is multiplied by the predicted value, and then the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors are added to obtain the prediction of the current block. value.
本申请通过基于当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到当前块的多个权重因子和多个预测值,将对应于同一个先验候选运动矢量的权重因子和预测值相乘,再将对应于多个先验候选运动矢量的多个乘积相加得到当前块的预测值,这样得到的当前块的预测值是结合了多个先验候选运动矢量,从而能够更好的拟合现实世界中丰富多变的纹理,提升帧间预测的准确度,减小帧间预测的误差,改善帧间预测的整体率失真(rate-distortion optimization,RDO)效率。The present application obtains multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values of the current block based on the respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and assigns the weighting factors and prediction values corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector The predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors, and the predicted value of the current block obtained in this way is a combination of multiple prior candidate motion vectors. It fits the rich and changeable textures in the real world well, improves the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduces the error of inter-frame prediction, and improves the overall rate-distortion optimization (RDO) efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
在一种可能的实现方式中,除了获取P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量外,还可以获取该P个已重建图像块各自的相关信息。已重建图像块的相关信息可以是该已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,该多个预测误差值也是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的。In a possible implementation manner, in addition to acquiring the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the respective related information of the P reconstructed image blocks may also be acquired. The relevant information of the reconstructed image block may be a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and the plurality of prediction error values are also based on the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and a plurality of a posteriori The predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector is determined.
根据已重建图像块的多个后验候选运动矢量分别对已重建图像块执行运动补偿,可以得到多个预测值,该多个预测值和前述多个后验候选运动矢量对应。Motion compensation is respectively performed on the reconstructed image block according to a plurality of a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and a plurality of prediction values can be obtained, and the plurality of prediction values correspond to the foregoing a plurality of candidate a posteriori motion vectors.
将多个预测值分别与已重建图像块的重建值进行比较,得到多个预测误差值,该多个预测误差值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应。本申请可以采用绝对误差和(sum of absolute difference,SAD)或平方误差和(sum of squared difference,SSE)等方法获取对应于某一 个后验候选运动矢量的预测误差值。The multiple prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain multiple prediction error values, and the multiple prediction error values correspond to multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors. In the present application, methods such as sum of absolute difference (SAD) or sum of squared difference (SSE) can be used to obtain the prediction error value corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
若已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量,则已重建图像块的与上述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值是指对应于上述多个后验候选运动矢量的多个预测误差值;若已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量中的部分运动矢量,则已重建图像块的与上述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值是指从对应于上述多个后验候选运动矢量的多个预测误差值中选出的与该部分运动矢量对应的预测误差值。If the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors refer to the multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. Multiple prediction error values of a posteriori candidate motion vector; if the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to some motion vectors in the above multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the reconstructed image block is the same as the above multiple motion vectors. The multiple prediction error values corresponding to the a posteriori motion vectors refer to the prediction error values corresponding to the partial motion vector selected from the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
相应的,输入神经网络的包括P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值。Correspondingly, the input to the neural network includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors for each of the P reconstructed image blocks and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
在一种可能的实现方式中,除了获取P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量外,还可以获取该P个已重建图像块各自的相关信息。已重建图像块的相关信息可以是该已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,该多个概率值也是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的。In a possible implementation manner, in addition to acquiring the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the respective related information of the P reconstructed image blocks may also be acquired. The relevant information of the reconstructed image block may be a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and the plurality of probability values are also based on the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and a plurality of a posteriori candidate motions The predicted value corresponding to the vector is determined.
已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值可以有以下两种获取方法:The multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
一种是根据上述方法中得到的已重建图像块的多个预测误差值,得到已重建图像块的多个概率值。例如,可以使用归一化指数函数、线性归一化方法等方法对已重建图像块的多个预测误差值进行归一化处理,得到多个预测误差值的归一化值,该多个预测误差值的归一化值即为已重建图像块的多个概率值,基于已重建图像块的多个预测误差值与多个后验运动矢量的对应关系,已重建图像块的多个概率值也与已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量对应,该概率值可以表示与之对应的后验运动矢量成为该已重建图像块的最优运动矢量的概率。One is to obtain multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the above method. For example, a normalized exponential function, a linear normalization method, etc. can be used to normalize the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain the normalized values of the multiple prediction error values. The normalized value of the error value is the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block. Based on the correspondence between the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block and the multiple posterior motion vectors, the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block Also corresponding to a plurality of posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, the probability value can represent the probability that the posterior motion vector corresponding to it becomes the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
另一种是将已重建图像块的重建值和第一种方法中得到的已重建图像块的多个预测值,输入经训练的神经网络得到已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。该神经网络可以参照上述训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the multiple predicted values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method into the trained neural network to obtain the reconstructed image block corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors multiple probability values. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
相应的,输入神经网络的包括P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Correspondingly, the input to the neural network includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the P reconstructed image blocks and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of posterior motion vectors.
因此,在通过上述两种方法得到的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值或者概率值之后,已重建图像块的最优运动矢量可以有以下两种获取方法:Therefore, after obtaining multiple prediction error values or probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors through the above two methods, the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by the following two methods:
一种是将与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值中的最小预测误差值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。One is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the smallest prediction error value among the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
另一种是将与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值中的最大概率值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。The other is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the largest probability value among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
需要说明的时,本申请中的最优运动矢量仅是指通过上述两种方法之一获取到的运动矢量,是已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量的其中之一,但该最优运动矢量并不是对已重建图像块进行帧间预测时采用的唯一的运动矢量。When it needs to be explained, the optimal motion vector in this application only refers to the motion vector obtained by one of the above two methods, which is one of the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. Motion vectors are not the only motion vectors used in inter-predicting reconstructed image blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在获取当前块的重建值后,可以立即获取当前块的后验运动矢量及其相关信息,该获取方法包括:In a possible implementation manner, after obtaining the reconstruction value of the current block, the posterior motion vector of the current block and its related information can be obtained immediately, and the obtaining method includes:
一、根据当前块的重建值和当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,当前块的多个后验 运动矢量是根据当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的。1. Obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block. The multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the block are obtained from the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block.
二、根据当前块的重建值和当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值输入神经网络,得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,当前块的多个后验运动矢量是根据当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的,或者,根据当前块的多个预测误差值得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。2. Input the neural network according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block to obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple probabilities corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors value, the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, or the multiple a posteriori motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple prediction error values of the current block. a probability value.
三、将当前块的多个后验运动矢量中概率值最大或预测误差值最小的后验运动矢量确定为当前块的最优运动矢量。3. Determine the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block as the optimal motion vector of the current block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,训练引擎在训练神经网络时所依据的训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;根据所述训练数据集合训练得到神经网络。In a possible implementation manner, the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of reconstructed image blocks. a posteriori motion vector, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, and multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, the The plurality of reconstructed image blocks are image blocks in the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block; a neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
在一种可能的实现方式中,训练引擎在训练神经网络时所依据的训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;根据所述训练数据集合训练得到神经网络。In a possible implementation manner, the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of reconstructed image blocks. A posteriori motion vector, multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, so The plurality of reconstructed image blocks are image blocks in the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block; a neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
在一种可能的实现方式中,训练引擎在训练神经网络时所依据的训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;根据所述训练数据集合训练得到神经网络。In a possible implementation manner, the training data set on which the training engine trains the neural network includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes the respective optimal values of the multiple reconstructed image blocks a motion vector, and a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the current block, a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors, the plurality of reconstructed image blocks being the spatial neighborhood of the current block and/or An image block in the temporal neighborhood; a neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
可选的,所述神经网络至少包括卷积层和激活层。其中,所述卷积层的卷积核的深度为2、3、4、5、6、16、24、32、48、64或者128;所述卷积层中的卷积核的尺寸为1×1、3×3、5×5或者7×7。例如,某一卷积层的尺寸为3×3×2×10,其中,3×3表示该卷积层中的卷积核的尺寸;2表示卷积层中包含的卷积核的深度,输入该卷积层的数据通道数和卷积层中包含的卷积核的深度一致,即输入该卷积层的数据通道数也是2;10表示卷积层中包含的卷积核的个数,输出该卷积层的数据通道数和卷积层中包含的卷积核的个数一致,即输出该卷积层的数据通道数也是10。Optionally, the neural network includes at least a convolution layer and an activation layer. Wherein, the depth of the convolution kernel of the convolution layer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64 or 128; the size of the convolution kernel in the convolution layer is 1 ×1, 3×3, 5×5 or 7×7. For example, the size of a convolutional layer is 3×3×2×10, where 3×3 represents the size of the convolution kernel in the convolutional layer; 2 represents the depth of the convolutional kernel included in the convolutional layer, The number of data channels input to the convolution layer is the same as the depth of the convolution kernel contained in the convolution layer, that is, the number of data channels input to the convolution layer is also 2; 10 represents the number of convolution kernels contained in the convolution layer. , the number of data channels outputting the convolution layer is the same as the number of convolution kernels contained in the convolution layer, that is, the number of data channels outputting the convolution layer is also 10.
可选的,所述神经网络包括卷积神经网络CNN、深度神经网络DNN或者循环神经网络RNN。Optionally, the neural network includes a convolutional neural network CNN, a deep neural network DNN or a recurrent neural network RNN.
第二方面,本申请提供一种编码器,包括处理电路,用于执行根据上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a second aspect, the present application provides an encoder, comprising a processing circuit for performing the method according to any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
第三方面,本申请提供一种解码器,包括处理电路,用于执行上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a third aspect, the present application provides a decoder, including a processing circuit, configured to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspect.
第四方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,包括程序代码,当其在计算机或处理器上执行时,用于执行上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, including program code, which, when executed on a computer or a processor, is used to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
第五方面,本申请提供一种编码器,包括:一个或多个处理器;非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,耦合到所述处理器并存储由所述处理器执行的程序,其中所述程序在由所述处 理器执行时,使得所述解码器执行上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides an encoder, comprising: one or more processors; a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processors and storing a program executed by the processors, wherein the The program, when executed by the processor, causes the decoder to execute the method described in any one of the first aspect above.
第六方面,本申请提供一种解码器,包括:一个或多个处理器;非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,耦合到所述处理器并存储由所述处理器执行的程序,其中所述程序在由所述处理器执行时,使得所述编码器执行上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a decoder comprising: one or more processors; a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processors and storing a program executed by the processors, wherein the The program, when executed by the processor, causes the encoder to execute the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
第七方面,本申请提供一种非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,包括程序代码,当其由计算机设备执行时,用于执行上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, comprising program code, which, when executed by a computer device, is used to perform the method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
第八方面,本发明涉及帧间预测装置,有益效果可以参见第一方面的描述此处不再赘述。所述帧间预测装置具有实现上述第一方面的方法实施例中行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。在一个可能的设计中,所述帧间预测装置包括:运动估计单元和帧间预测处理单元,其中,运动估计单元,用于获取当前块的周边区域中的P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量,所述周边区域包括所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域;帧间预测处理单元,用于实现上述第一方面任一项所述的方法。这些模块可以执行上述第一方面方法示例中的相应功能,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。In an eighth aspect, the present invention relates to an inter-frame prediction apparatus, and the beneficial effects can be referred to the description of the first aspect and will not be repeated here. The inter-frame prediction apparatus has the function of implementing the behavior in the method embodiment of the first aspect. The functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions. In a possible design, the inter-frame prediction apparatus includes: a motion estimation unit and an inter-frame prediction processing unit, wherein the motion estimation unit is configured to acquire the respective motions of the P reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block A vector, where the surrounding area includes a spatial neighborhood and/or a temporal neighborhood of the current block; an inter-frame prediction processing unit, configured to implement the method described in any one of the first aspects. These modules can perform the corresponding functions in the method examples of the first aspect. For details, please refer to the detailed descriptions in the method examples, which will not be repeated here.
附图及以下说明中将详细描述一个或多个实施例。其它特征、目的和优点在说明、附图以及权利要求中是显而易见的。One or more embodiments are described in detail in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages are apparent from the description, drawings, and claims.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1a为本申请实施例的译码系统10的示例性框图;FIG. 1a is an exemplary block diagram of a decoding system 10 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1b为本申请实施例的视频译码系统40的示例性框图;FIG. 1b is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoding system 40 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例的视频编码器20的示例性框图;FIG. 2 is an exemplary block diagram of a video encoder 20 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例的视频解码器30的示例性框图;FIG. 3 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoder 30 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例的视频译码设备400的示例性框图;FIG. 4 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoding apparatus 400 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例的装置500的示例性框图;FIG. 5 is an exemplary block diagram of an apparatus 500 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6a-图6e为本申请实施例的用于帧间预测的神经网络的几个示例性架构;6a-6e are several exemplary architectures of a neural network for inter-frame prediction according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例的候选图像块的示例性的示意图;FIG. 7 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a candidate image block according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程800的流程图;8 is a flowchart of a process 800 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程900的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a process 900 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例的搜索窗口的示例性的示意图;FIG. 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a search window according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程1100的流程图;11 is a flowchart of a process 1100 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程1200的流程图;12 is a flowchart of a process 1200 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例的帧间预测装置1300的结构示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请实施例提供一种基于AI的视频压缩技术,尤其是提供一种基于神经网络的视频压缩技术,具体提供一种基于神经网络(neural network,NN)的帧间预测技术,以改进传统的混合视频编解码系统。Embodiments of the present application provide an AI-based video compression technology, in particular a neural network-based video compression technology, and specifically provide an inter-frame prediction technology based on a neural network (NN) to improve traditional Hybrid video codec system.
视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图像序列。在视频编码领域,术语“图像(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图片(image)”可以用作同义词。视频编码(或通常称 为编码)包括视频编码和视频解码两部分。视频编码在源侧执行,通常包括处理(例如,压缩)原始视频图像以减少表示该视频图像所需的数据量(从而更高效存储和/或传输)。视频解码在目的地侧执行,通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理,以重建视频图像。实施例涉及的视频图像(或通常称为图像)的“编码”应理解为视频图像或视频序列的“编码”或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分也合称为编解码(编码和解码,CODEC)。Video coding generally refers to the processing of sequences of images that form a video or video sequence. In the field of video coding, the terms "picture", "frame" or "image" may be used as synonyms. Video encoding (or commonly referred to as encoding) includes two parts, video encoding and video decoding. Video encoding is performed on the source side and typically involves processing (eg, compressing) the original video image to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video image (and thus store and/or transmit more efficiently). Video decoding is performed on the destination side and typically involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video image. The "encoding" of a video image (or commonly referred to as an image) in relation to the embodiments should be understood as the "encoding" or "decoding" of a video image or a video sequence. The encoding part and the decoding part are also collectively referred to as codec (encoding and decoding, CODEC).
在无损视频编码情况下,可以重建原始视频图像,即重建的视频图像与原始视频图像具有相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下,通过量化等执行进一步压缩,来减少表示视频图像所需的数据量,而解码器侧无法完全重建视频图像,即重建的视频图像的质量比原始视频图像的质量较低或较差。In the case of lossless video coding, the original video image can be reconstructed, ie the reconstructed video image has the same quality as the original video image (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission). In the case of lossy video coding, further compression is performed through quantization, etc. to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video image, and the decoder side cannot completely reconstruct the video image, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video image is higher than that of the original video image. low or poor.
几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即,将像素域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列中的每个图像通常分割成不重叠的块集合,通常在块级上进行编码。换句话说,编码器通常在块(视频块)级处理即编码视频,例如,通过空间(帧内)预测和时间(帧间)预测来产生预测块;从当前块(当前处理/待处理的块)中减去预测块,得到残差块;在变换域中变换残差块并量化残差块,以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量,而解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于编码或压缩的块,以重建用于表示的当前块。另外,编码器需要重复解码器的处理步骤,使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如,帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重建像素,用于处理,即编码后续块。Several video coding standards fall under the category of "lossy hybrid video codecs" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the pixel domain with 2D transform coding in the transform domain for applying quantization). Each image in a video sequence is usually partitioned into sets of non-overlapping blocks, usually encoded at the block level. In other words, encoders typically process i.e. encode video at the block (video block) level, eg, by spatial (intra) prediction and temporal (inter) prediction to generate prediction blocks; block) to subtract the prediction block to get the residual block; transform the residual block in the transform domain and quantize the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will process inversely with respect to the encoder Partially applied to encoded or compressed blocks to reconstruct the current block for representation. Additionally, the encoder needs to repeat the decoder's processing steps so that the encoder and decoder generate the same predictions (eg, intra- and inter-prediction) and/or reconstructed pixels for processing, ie, encoding subsequent blocks.
在以下译码系统10的实施例中,编码器20和解码器30根据图1a至图3进行描述。In the following embodiments of the decoding system 10, the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 are described with respect to FIGS. 1a to 3 .
图1a为本申请实施例的译码系统10的示例性框图,例如可以利用本申请技术的视频译码系统10(或简称为译码系统10)。视频译码系统10中的视频编码器20(或简称为编码器20)和视频解码器30(或简称为解码器30)代表可用于根据本申请中描述的各种示例执行各技术的设备等。FIG. 1a is an exemplary block diagram of a decoding system 10 according to an embodiment of the present application, for example, a video decoding system 10 (or simply referred to as a decoding system 10 ) that can utilize the technology of the present application. Video encoder 20 (or encoder 20 for short) and video decoder 30 (or decoder 30 for short) in video coding system 10 represent devices, etc. that may be used to perform techniques in accordance with the various examples described in this application .
如图1a所示,译码系统10包括源设备12,源设备12用于将编码图像等编码图像数据21提供给用于对编码图像数据21进行解码的目的设备14。As shown in FIG. 1 a , the decoding system 10 includes a source device 12 for providing encoded image data 21 such as encoded images to a destination device 14 for decoding the encoded image data 21 .
源设备12包括编码器20,另外即可选地,可包括图像源16、图像预处理器等预处理器(或预处理单元)18、通信接口(或通信单元)22。The source device 12 includes an encoder 20 and, alternatively, an image source 16 , a preprocessor (or preprocessing unit) 18 such as an image preprocessor, and a communication interface (or communication unit) 22 .
图像源16可包括或可以为任意类型的用于捕获现实世界图像等的图像捕获设备,和/或任意类型的图像生成设备,例如用于生成计算机动画图像的计算机图形处理器或任意类型的用于获取和/或提供现实世界图像、计算机生成图像(例如,屏幕内容、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)图像和/或其任意组合(例如增强现实(augmented reality,AR)图像)的设备。所述图像源可以为存储上述图像中的任意图像的任意类型的内存或存储器。Image source 16 may include or be any type of image capture device for capturing real-world images, etc., and/or any type of image generation device, such as a computer graphics processor or any type of user for generating computer animation images. Devices used to acquire and/or provide real-world images, computer-generated images (e.g., screen content, virtual reality (VR) images, and/or any combination thereof (e.g., augmented reality, AR) images). The image source may be any type of memory or storage that stores any of the above-mentioned images.
为了区分预处理器(或预处理单元)18执行的处理,图像(或图像数据)17也可称为原始图像(或原始图像数据)17。To distinguish the processing performed by the preprocessor (or preprocessing unit) 18 , the image (or image data) 17 may also be referred to as the original image (or original image data) 17 .
预处理器18用于接收原始图像数据17,并对原始图像数据17进行预处理,得到预处理图像(或预处理图像数据)19。例如,预处理器18执行的预处理可包括修剪、颜色格式转换(例如从RGB转换为YCbCr)、调色或去噪。可以理解的是,预处理单元18可以为可选组件。The preprocessor 18 is configured to receive the original image data 17 and preprocess the original image data 17 to obtain a preprocessed image (or preprocessed image data) 19 . For example, the preprocessing performed by the preprocessor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, from RGB to YCbCr), toning, or denoising. It is understood that the preprocessing unit 18 may be an optional component.
视频编码器(或编码器)20用于接收预处理图像数据19并提供编码图像数据21(下 面将根据图2等进一步描述)。A video encoder (or encoder) 20 is used to receive preprocessed image data 19 and to provide encoded image data 21 (described further below with respect to Figure 2 etc.).
源设备12中的通信接口22可用于:接收编码图像数据21并通过通信信道13向目的设备14等另一设备或任何其它设备发送编码图像数据21(或其它任意处理后的版本),以便存储或直接重建。The communication interface 22 in the source device 12 can be used to: receive the encoded image data 21 and send the encoded image data 21 (or any other processed version) over the communication channel 13 to another device such as the destination device 14 or any other device for storage or rebuild directly.
目的设备14包括解码器30,另外即可选地,可包括通信接口(或通信单元)28、后处理器(或后处理单元)32和显示设备34。The destination device 14 includes a decoder 30 and may additionally, alternatively, include a communication interface (or communication unit) 28 , a post-processor (or post-processing unit) 32 and a display device 34 .
目的设备14中的通信接口28用于直接从源设备12或从存储设备等任意其它源设备接收编码图像数据21(或其它任意处理后的版本),例如,存储设备为编码图像数据存储设备,并将编码图像数据21提供给解码器30。The communication interface 28 in the destination device 14 is used to receive the encoded image data 21 (or any other processed version) directly from the source device 12 or from any other source device such as a storage device, for example, the storage device is an encoded image data storage device, The encoded image data 21 is supplied to the decoder 30 .
通信接口22和通信接口28可用于通过源设备12与目的设备14之间的直连通信链路,例如直接有线或无线连接等,或者通过任意类型的网络,例如有线网络、无线网络或其任意组合、任意类型的私网和公网或其任意类型的组合,发送或接收编码图像数据(或编码数据)21。Communication interface 22 and communication interface 28 may be used through a direct communication link between source device 12 and destination device 14, such as a direct wired or wireless connection, etc., or through any type of network, such as a wired network, a wireless network, or any Combination, any type of private network and public network, or any type of combination, send or receive encoded image data (or encoded data) 21 .
例如,通信接口22可用于将编码图像数据21封装为报文等合适的格式,和/或使用任意类型的传输编码或处理来处理所述编码后的图像数据,以便在通信链路或通信网络上进行传输。For example, the communication interface 22 may be used to encapsulate the encoded image data 21 into a suitable format such as a message, and/or use any type of transfer encoding or processing to process the encoded image data for transmission over a communication link or communication network transfer on.
通信接口28与通信接口22对应,例如,可用于接收传输数据,并使用任意类型的对应传输解码或处理和/或解封装对传输数据进行处理,得到编码图像数据21。The communication interface 28 corresponds to the communication interface 22 and may be used, for example, to receive transmission data and process the transmission data using any type of corresponding transmission decoding or processing and/or decapsulation to obtain encoded image data 21 .
通信接口22和通信接口28均可配置为如图1a中从源设备12指向目的设备14的对应通信信道13的箭头所指示的单向通信接口,或双向通信接口,并且可用于发送和接收消息等,以建立连接,确认并交换与通信链路和/或例如编码后的图像数据传输等数据传输相关的任何其它信息,等等。Both the communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 can be configured as a one-way communication interface as indicated by the arrow from the source device 12 to the corresponding communication channel 13 of the destination device 14 in FIG. 1a, or a two-way communication interface, and can be used to send and receive messages etc. to establish a connection, acknowledge and exchange any other information related to a communication link and/or data transfer such as encoded image data transfer, etc.
视频解码器(或解码器)30用于接收编码图像数据21并提供解码图像数据(或解码图像数据)31(下面将根据图3等进一步描述)。A video decoder (or decoder) 30 is used to receive encoded image data 21 and to provide decoded image data (or decoded image data) 31 (described further below with reference to FIG. 3 etc.).
后处理器32用于对解码后的图像等解码图像数据31(也称为重建后的图像数据)进行后处理,得到后处理后的图像等后处理图像数据33。后处理单元32执行的后处理可以包括例如颜色格式转换(例如从YCbCr转换为RGB)、调色、修剪或重采样,或者用于产生供显示设备34等显示的解码图像数据31等任何其它处理。The post-processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded image data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed image data) such as a decoded image to obtain post-processed image data 33 such as a post-processed image. Post-processing performed by post-processing unit 32 may include, for example, color format conversion (eg, from YCbCr to RGB), toning, trimming, or resampling, or any other processing used to generate decoded image data 31 for display by display device 34, etc. .
显示设备34用于接收后处理图像数据33,以向用户或观看者等显示图像。显示设备34可以为或包括任意类型的用于表示重建后图像的显示器,例如,集成或外部显示屏或显示器。例如,显示屏可包括液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(organic light emitting diode,OLED)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微型LED显示器、硅基液晶显示器(liquid crystal on silicon,LCoS)、数字光处理器(digital light processor,DLP)或任意类型的其它显示屏。A display device 34 is used to receive post-processed image data 33 to display the image to a user or viewer or the like. Display device 34 may be or include any type of display for representing the reconstructed image, eg, an integrated or external display screen or display. For example, the display screen may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS) display ), digital light processor (DLP), or any other type of display.
译码系统10还包括训练引擎25,训练引擎25用于训练编码器20(尤其是编码器20中的帧间预测单元)或解码器30(尤其是解码器30中的帧间预测单元),以处理输入图像或图像区域或图像块以生成输入图像或图像区域或图像块的预测值。The decoding system 10 further comprises a training engine 25 for training the encoder 20 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the encoder 20) or the decoder 30 (in particular the inter prediction unit in the decoder 30), to process an input image or image region or image block to generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image block.
可选的,本申请实施例中训练数据集合包括:多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概 率值,以及当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量、与多个后验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,多个已重建图像块是当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块。经训练数据集合训练得到神经网络,该神经网络的输入为当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,输出为当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量、与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the training data set includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes multiple posterior motion vectors, multiple posterior motion vectors, and multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks. Multiple probability values corresponding to the tested motion vector, multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and multiple reconstructed image blocks are the spatial neighborhoods of the current block and/or image patches in the temporal neighborhood. A neural network is obtained after training with the training data set, and the input of the neural network is a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. , the output is multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
可选的,本申请实施例中训练数据集合包括:多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,以及当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量、与多个后验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,多个已重建图像块是当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块。经训练数据集合训练得到神经网络,该神经网络的输入为当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,输出为当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量、与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the training data set includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes multiple posterior motion vectors, multiple posterior motion vectors, and multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks. Multiple prediction error values corresponding to the tested motion vector, multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and multiple reconstructed image blocks are the spatial neighbors of the current block. Image patches in the domain and/or temporal neighborhood. A neural network is obtained by training the training data set, and the input of the neural network is a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and a plurality of prediction errors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. The output is multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
可选的,本申请实施例中训练数据集合包括:多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,以及当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量、与多个后验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,多个已重建图像块是当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块。经训练数据集合训练得到神经网络,该神经网络的输入为当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,输出为当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量、与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, the training data set in this embodiment of the present application includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks, and multiple image blocks of the current block. A posteriori candidate motion vector, multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, multiple reconstructed image blocks are image blocks in the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block. A neural network is obtained by training the training data set, the input of the neural network is the respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and the output is multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and multiple multiple probability values corresponding to a priori candidate motion vector.
可选的,本申请实施例中训练数据集合包括:多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值,以及图像块的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。经训练数据集合训练得到神经网络,该神经网络的输入为当前块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值,输出为当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, the training data set in the embodiment of the present application includes: information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes the reconstructed value of the image block and the predicted value corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and A plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the image block, and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors. A neural network is obtained after training with the training data set. The input of the neural network is the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, and the output is multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, and multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to the motion vector.
训练引擎25训练神经网络的过程使得输出的当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量逼近当前块的多个后验运动矢量,与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值逼近与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。每个训练过程可以使用64个图像的小批量大小和1e-4的初始学习率,遵循步长大小为10。多组图像块的信息可以是通过编码器对多个当前块进行帧间编码时生成的数据。神经网络能够用于实现本申请实施例提供的帧间预测方法,即,将当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块的运动矢量及其相关信息输入该神经网络,可以得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。下文将结合图6a-6e详细说明神经网络。The process of training the neural network by the training engine 25 makes the outputted multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block approximate multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, and the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are approximated to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to the posterior motion vector. Each training process can use a mini-batch size of 64 images and an initial learning rate of 1e-4, following a step size of 10. The information of the multiple groups of image blocks may be data generated when the encoder performs inter-frame encoding on multiple current blocks. The neural network can be used to implement the inter-frame prediction method provided by the embodiments of the present application, that is, the motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block and their related information are input into the neural network, and the current block can be obtained. A plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors. The neural network will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
本申请实施例中的训练数据可以存入数据库(未示意)中,训练引擎25基于训练数据训练得到目标模型(例如:可以是用于图像帧间预测的神经网络)。需要说明的是,本申请实施例对于训练数据的来源不做限定,例如可以是从云端或其他地方获取训练数据进行模型训练。The training data in this embodiment of the present application may be stored in a database (not shown), and the training engine 25 trains a target model based on the training data (for example, a neural network for image inter-frame prediction). It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the source of the training data, for example, the training data may be obtained from the cloud or other places to perform model training.
训练引擎25训练得到的目标模型可以应用于译码系统10中,例如,应用于图1a所示的源设备12(例如编码器20)或目的设备14(例如解码器30)。训练引擎25可以在云端训练得到目标模型,然后译码系统10从云端下载并使用该目标模型;或者,训练引擎25可以在云端训练得到目标模型并使用该目标模型,译码系统10从云端直接获取处理 结果。例如,训练引擎25训练得到具备帧间预测功能的目标模型,译码系统10从云端下载该目标模型,然后编码器20中的帧间预测单元244或解码器30中的帧间预测单元344可以根据该目标模型对输入的图像或图像块进行帧间预测,得到图像或图像块的预测。又例如,训练引擎25训练得到具备帧间预测功能的目标模型,译码系统10无需从云端下载该目标模型,编码器20或解码器30将图像或图像块传输给云端,由云端通过目标模型对该图像或图像块进行帧间预测,得到图像或图像块的预测并传输给编码器20或解码器30。The target model trained by the training engine 25 can be applied to the decoding system 10, for example, the source device 12 (eg, the encoder 20) or the destination device 14 (eg, the decoder 30) shown in FIG. 1a. The training engine 25 can train on the cloud to obtain the target model, and then the decoding system 10 downloads and uses the target model from the cloud; or, the training engine 25 can train on the cloud to obtain the target model and use the target model, and the decoding system 10 directly downloads the target model from the cloud. Get the processing result. For example, the training engine 25 trains a target model with an inter-frame prediction function, the decoding system 10 downloads the target model from the cloud, and then the inter-frame prediction unit 244 in the encoder 20 or the inter-frame prediction unit 344 in the decoder 30 can Perform inter-frame prediction on the input image or image block according to the target model, and obtain the prediction of the image or image block. For another example, the training engine 25 trains a target model with an inter-frame prediction function, and the decoding system 10 does not need to download the target model from the cloud. The encoder 20 or the decoder 30 transmits the image or image block to the cloud, and the cloud passes the target model through the target model. The image or image block is inter-predicted, and the prediction of the image or image block is obtained and transmitted to the encoder 20 or the decoder 30 .
尽管图1a示出了源设备12和目的设备14作为独立的设备,但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的设备14或同时包括源设备12和目的设备14的功能,即同时包括源设备12或对应功能和目的设备14或对应功能。在这些实施例中,源设备12或对应功能和目的设备14或对应功能可以使用相同硬件和/或软件或通过单独的硬件和/或软件或其任意组合来实现。Although FIG. 1a shows source device 12 and destination device 14 as separate devices, device embodiments may include both source device 12 and destination device 14 or the functions of both source device 12 and destination device 14, ie, include both source device 12 and destination device 14. Device 12 or corresponding function and destination device 14 or corresponding function. In these embodiments, source device 12 or corresponding functionality and destination device 14 or corresponding functionality may be implemented using the same hardware and/or software or by separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof.
根据描述,图1a所示的源设备12和/或目的设备14中的不同单元或功能的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用而有所不同,这对技术人员来说是显而易见的。From the description, the existence and (exact) division of the different units or functions in the source device 12 and/or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1a may vary depending on the actual device and application, as will be apparent to the skilled person .
编码器20(例如视频编码器20)或解码器30(例如视频解码器30)或两者都可通过如图1b所示的处理电路实现,例如一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、离散逻辑、硬件、视频编码专用处理器或其任意组合。编码器20可以通过处理电路46实现,以包含参照图2编码器20论述的各种模块和/或本文描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统。解码器30可以通过处理电路46实现,以包含参照图3解码器30论述的各种模块和/或本文描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统。所述处理电路46可用于执行下文论述的各种操作。如图5所示,如果部分技术在软件中实施,则设备可以将软件的指令存储在合适的非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质中,并且使用一个或多个处理器在硬件中执行指令,从而执行本申请技术。视频编码器20和视频解码器30中的其中一个可作为组合编解码器(encoder/decoder,CODEC)的一部分集成在单个设备中,如图1b所示。Encoder 20 (eg video encoder 20) or decoder 30 (eg video decoder 30) or both may be implemented by processing circuitry as shown in Figure 1b, eg one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, special-purpose processor for video encoding, or any combination thereof . Encoder 20 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 to include the various modules discussed with reference to encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Decoder 30 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 to include the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein. The processing circuitry 46 may be used to perform various operations discussed below. As shown in FIG. 5, if parts of the techniques are implemented in software, a device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium and execute the instructions in hardware using one or more processors, thereby Implement the techniques of this application. One of the video encoder 20 and the video decoder 30 may be integrated in a single device as part of a combined codec (encoder/decoder, CODEC), as shown in Figure 1b.
源设备12和目的设备14可包括各种设备中的任一种,包括任意类型的手持设备或固定设备,例如,笔记本电脑或膝上型电脑、手机、智能手机、平板或平板电脑、相机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视机、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流设备(例如,内容业务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收设备、广播发射设备,等等,并可以不使用或使用任意类型的操作系统。在一些情况下,源设备12和目的设备14可配备用于无线通信的组件。因此,源设备12和目的设备14可以是无线通信设备。Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary device, such as a laptop or laptop, cell phone, smartphone, tablet or tablet, camera, Desktop computers, set-top boxes, televisions, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (eg, content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiving equipment, broadcast transmitting equipment, etc., and may not Use or use any type of operating system. In some cases, source device 12 and destination device 14 may be equipped with components for wireless communication. Thus, source device 12 and destination device 14 may be wireless communication devices.
在一些情况下,图1a所示的视频译码系统10仅仅是示例性的,本申请提供的技术可适用于视频编码设置(例如,视频编码或视频解码),这些设置不一定包括编码设备与解码设备之间的任何数据通信。在其它示例中,数据从本地存储器中检索,通过网络发送,等等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并将数据存储到存储器中,和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器中检索数据并对数据进行解码。在一些示例中,编码和解码由相互不通信而只是编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器中检索并解码数据的设备来执行。In some cases, the video coding system 10 shown in FIG. 1a is merely exemplary, and the techniques provided herein may be applicable to video encoding settings (eg, video encoding or video decoding) that do not necessarily include encoding devices and Decode any data communication between devices. In other examples, data is retrieved from local storage, sent over a network, and so on. The video encoding device may encode and store the data in memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve and decode the data from the memory. In some examples, encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but merely encode data to and/or retrieve and decode data from memory.
图1b为本申请实施例的视频译码系统40的示例性框图,如图1b所示,视频译码系统40可以包含成像设备41、视频编码器20、视频解码器30(和/或藉由处理电路46实施 的视频编/解码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个内存存储器44和/或显示设备45。FIG. 1b is an exemplary block diagram of a video coding system 40 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1b, the video coding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, a video encoder 20, a video decoder 30 (and/or by video encoder/decoder implemented by processing circuitry 46 ), antenna 42 , one or more processors 43 , one or more memory memories 44 and/or display device 45 .
如图1b所示,成像设备41、天线42、处理电路46、视频编码器20、视频解码器30、处理器43、内存存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。在不同实例中,视频译码系统40可以只包含视频编码器20或只包含视频解码器30。As shown in Figure 1b, the imaging device 41, antenna 42, processing circuit 46, video encoder 20, video decoder 30, processor 43, memory storage 44 and/or display device 45 can communicate with each other. In different examples, video coding system 40 may include only video encoder 20 or only video decoder 30 .
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外,在一些实例中,显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。处理电路46可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频译码系统40也可以包含可选的处理器43,该可选处理器43类似地可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。另外,内存存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器,例如易失性存储器(例如,静态随机存取存储器(static random access memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)等)或非易失性存储器(例如,闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中,内存存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在其它实例中,处理电路46可以包含存储器(例如,缓存等)用于实施图像缓冲器等。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data. Additionally, in some instances, display device 45 may be used to present video data. Processing circuitry 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, graphics processors, general purpose processors, and the like. Video coding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. Additionally, the memory memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (eg, static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile memory volatile memory (eg, flash memory, etc.), etc. In a non-limiting example, memory storage 44 may be implemented by cache memory. In other examples, processing circuitry 46 may include memory (eg, cache memory, etc.) for implementing image buffers, and the like.
在一些实例中,通过逻辑电路实施的视频编码器20可以包含(例如,通过处理电路46或内存存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理电路46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过处理电路46实施的视频编码器20,以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。In some examples, video encoder 20 implemented by logic circuitry may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by processing circuitry 46 or memory memory 44 ) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing circuitry 46 ). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include video encoder 20 implemented by processing circuitry 46 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits may be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
在一些实例中,视频解码器30可以以类似方式通过处理电路46实施,以实施参照图3的视频解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中,逻辑电路实施的视频解码器30可以包含(通过处理电路46或内存存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理电路46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过处理电路46实施的视频解码器30,以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。In some examples, video decoder 30 may be implemented by processing circuitry 46 in a similar manner to implement various of the types discussed with reference to video decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein. module. In some examples, logic circuit-implemented video decoder 30 may include an image buffer (implemented by processing circuit 46 or memory memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing circuit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include video decoder 30 implemented by processing circuitry 46 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述,经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等,例如与编码分割相关的数据(例如,变换系数或经量化变换系数,(如所论述的)可选指示符,和/或定义编码分割的数据)。视频译码系统40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的视频解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data. As discussed, the encoded bitstream may include data, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc., as discussed herein related to encoded video frames, such as data related to encoded partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients). , (as discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining the encoding split). Video coding system 40 may also include video decoder 30 coupled to antenna 42 for decoding the encoded bitstream. Display device 45 is used to present video frames.
应理解,本申请实施例中对于参考视频编码器20所描述的实例,视频解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素,视频解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素,相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中,视频编码器20可以将语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中,视频解码器30可以解析这种语法元素,并相应地解码相关视频数据。It should be understood that for the examples described with reference to the video encoder 20 in the embodiments of the present application, the video decoder 30 may be used to perform the opposite process. With regard to signaling syntax elements, video decoder 30 may be operable to receive and parse such syntax elements, decoding the associated video data accordingly. In some examples, video encoder 20 may entropy encode the syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, video decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode related video data accordingly.
为便于描述,参考通用视频编码(versatile video coding,VVC)参考软件或由ITU-T视频编码专家组(video coding experts group,VCEG)和ISO/IEC运动图像专家组(motion  picture experts group,MPEG)的视频编码联合工作组(joint collaboration team on video coding,JCT-VC)开发的高性能视频编码(high-efficiency video coding,HEVC)描述本申请实施例。本领域普通技术人员理解本申请实施例不限于HEVC或VVC。For ease of description, refer to the universal video coding (versatile video coding, VVC) reference software or by the ITU-T video coding experts group (video coding experts group, VCEG) and ISO/IEC motion picture experts group (motion picture experts group, MPEG) The high-efficiency video coding (HEVC) developed by the joint collaboration team on video coding (JCT-VC) describes the embodiments of the present application. Those of ordinary skill in the art understand that the embodiments of the present application are not limited to HEVC or VVC.
编码器和编码方法Encoders and Encoding Methods
图2为本申请实施例的视频编码器20的示例性框图。如图2所示,视频编码器20包括输入端(或输入接口)201、残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、反量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重建单元214、环路滤波器220、解码图像缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230、模式选择单元260、熵编码单元270和输出端(或输出接口)272。模式选择单元260可包括帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和分割单元262。帧间预测单元244可包括运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未示出)。图2所示的视频编码器20也可称为混合型视频编码器或基于混合型视频编解码器的视频编码器。FIG. 2 is an exemplary block diagram of a video encoder 20 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the video encoder 20 includes an input terminal (or input interface) 201, a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, A loop filter 220 , a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 , a mode selection unit 260 , an entropy encoding unit 270 and an output terminal (or output interface) 272 . Mode selection unit 260 may include inter prediction unit 244 , intra prediction unit 254 , and partition unit 262 . Inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown). The video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a hybrid video codec-based video encoder.
参见图2,帧间预测单元为经过训练的目标模型(亦称为神经网络),该神经网络用于处理输入图像或图像区域或图像块,以生成输入图像块的预测值。例如,用于帧间预测的神经网络用于接收输入的图像或图像区域或图像块,并且生成输入的图像或图像区域或图像块的预测值。下面将结合图6a-图6e详细地描述用于帧间预测的神经网络。Referring to FIG. 2 , the inter-frame prediction unit is a trained target model (also called a neural network) for processing an input image or image region or image block to generate a predicted value for the input image block. For example, a neural network for inter prediction is used to receive an input image or image region or image patch, and generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image patch. The neural network for inter prediction will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208和模式选择单元260组成编码器20的前向信号路径,而反量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重建单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、解码图像缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230、帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254组成编码器的后向信号路径,其中编码器20的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。反量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重建单元214、环路滤波器220、解码图像缓冲器230、帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254还组成视频编码器20的“内置解码器”。The residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208 and the mode selection unit 260 constitute the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop The path filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, the inter-frame prediction unit 244 and the intra-frame prediction unit 254 constitute the backward signal path of the encoder, wherein the backward signal path of the encoder 20 corresponds to the decoding signal path of the decoder (see decoder 30 in Figure 3). Inverse quantization unit 210 , inverse transform processing unit 212 , reconstruction unit 214 , loop filter 220 , decoded image buffer 230 , inter prediction unit 244 , and intra prediction unit 254 also make up the “built-in decoder” of video encoder 20 .
图像和图像分割(图像和块)Image and image segmentation (images and blocks)
编码器20可用于通过输入端201等接收图像(或图像数据)17,例如,形成视频或视频序列的图像序列中的图像。接收的图像或图像数据也可以是预处理后的图像(或预处理后的图像数据)19。为简单起见,以下描述使用图像17。图像17也可称为当前图像或待编码的图像(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图像与其它图像区分开时,其它图像例如同一视频序列,即也包括当前图像的视频序列,中的之前编码后图像和/或解码后图像)。The encoder 20 may be operable to receive images (or image data) 17, eg, images in a sequence of images forming a video or video sequence, via an input 201 or the like. The received image or image data may also be a preprocessed image (or preprocessed image data) 19 . For simplicity, the following description uses image 17. The image 17 may also be referred to as the current image or the image to be encoded (especially when distinguishing the current image from other images in video encoding, such as the same video sequence, i.e. the video sequence that also includes the current image, previously encoded in the post image and/or post decoded image).
(数字)图像为或可以视为具有强度值的像素点组成的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的像素点也可以称为像素(pixel或pel)(图像元素的简称)。阵列或图像在水平方向和垂直方向(或轴线)上的像素点数量决定了图像的大小和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色,通常采用三个颜色分量,即图像可以表示为或包括三个像素点阵列。在RBG格式或颜色空间中,图像包括对应的红色、绿色和蓝色像素点阵列。但是,在视频编码中,每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示,例如YCbCr,包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也用L表示)以及Cb、Cr表示的两个色度分量。亮度(luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如,在灰度等级图像中两者相同),而两个色度(chrominance,简写为chroma)分量Cb和Cr表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地,YCbCr格式的图像包括亮度像素点值(Y)的亮度像素点阵列和色度值(Cb和Cr)的两个色度像素点阵列。RGB格式的图像可以转换或变换为YCbCr格式,反之亦然,该过程也称为颜色变换或转换。如果图像是黑白的,则该图像 可以只包括亮度像素点阵列。相应地,图像可以为例如单色格式的亮度像素点阵列或4:2:0、4:2:2和4:4:4彩色格式的亮度像素点阵列和两个相应的色度像素点阵列。A (digital) image is or can be viewed as a two-dimensional array or matrix of pixel points with intensity values. The pixels in the array may also be called pixels or pels (short for picture elements). The number of pixels in the array or image in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) determines the size and/or resolution of the image. In order to represent color, three color components are usually used, that is, an image can be represented as or include an array of three pixel points. In RBG format or color space, an image includes an array of corresponding red, green and blue pixel points. However, in video coding, each pixel is usually represented in a luma/chroma format or color space, such as YCbCr, including a luma component denoted by Y (and sometimes L) and two chroma components denoted by Cb and Cr. The luminance (luma) component Y represents the luminance or gray level intensity (eg, both are the same in a grayscale image), while the two chrominance (chroma) components Cb and Cr represent the chrominance or color information components . Correspondingly, an image in YCbCr format includes a luminance pixel array of luminance pixel value (Y) and two chrominance pixel arrays of chrominance values (Cb and Cr). Images in RGB format can be converted or transformed to YCbCr format and vice versa, the process is also known as color transformation or conversion. If the image is black and white, the image may only include an array of luminance pixels. Correspondingly, the image may be, for example, a luminance pixel array in monochrome format or a luminance pixel array and two corresponding chrominance pixel arrays in 4:2:0, 4:2:2 and 4:4:4 color formats .
在一个实施例中,视频编码器20的实施例可包括图像分割单元(图2中未示出),用于将图像17分割成多个(通常不重叠)图像块203。这些块在H.265/HEVC和VVC标准中也可以称为根块、宏块(H.264/AVC)或编码树块(coding tree block,CTB),或编码树单元(coding tree unit,CTU)。分割单元可用于对视频序列中的所有图像使用相同的块大小和使用限定块大小的对应网格,或在图像或图像子集或图像组之间改变块大小,并将每个图像分割成对应块。In one embodiment, an embodiment of the video encoder 20 may include an image segmentation unit (not shown in FIG. 2 ) for segmenting the image 17 into a plurality of (generally non-overlapping) image blocks 203 . These blocks may also be referred to as root blocks, macroblocks (H.264/AVC) or coding tree blocks (CTBs), or coding tree units (CTUs) in the H.265/HEVC and VVC standards ). The segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size for all images in a video sequence and use a corresponding grid that defines the block size, or to vary the block size between images or subsets of images or groups of images, and to segment each image into corresponding Piece.
在其它实施例中,视频编码器可用于直接接收图像17的块203,例如,组成所述图像17的一个、几个或所有块。图像块203也可以称为当前图像块或待编码图像块。In other embodiments, the video encoder may be used to directly receive blocks 203 of the image 17 , eg, one, several or all of the blocks that make up the image 17 . The image block 203 may also be referred to as a current image block or an image block to be encoded.
与图像17一样,图像块203同样是或可认为是具有强度值(像素点值)的像素点组成的二维阵列或矩阵,但是图像块203的比图像17的小。换句话说,块203可包括一个像素点阵列(例如,单色图像17情况下的亮度阵列或彩色图像情况下的亮度阵列或色度阵列)或三个像素点阵列(例如,彩色图像17情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或根据所采用的颜色格式的任何其它数量和/或类型的阵列。块203的水平方向和垂直方向(或轴线)上的像素点数量限定了块203的大小。相应地,块可以为M×N(M列×N行)个像素点阵列,或M×N个变换系数阵列等。Like image 17 , image block 203 is also or can be considered as a two-dimensional array or matrix of pixels with intensity values (pixel values), but image block 203 is smaller than image 17 . In other words, block 203 may include an array of pixels (eg, a luminance array in the case of a monochrome image 17 or a luminance array or a chrominance array in the case of a color image) or three arrays of pixels (eg, in the case of a color image 17 ) (one luma array and two chrominance arrays) or any other number and/or type of arrays depending on the color format employed. The number of pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the block 203 defines the size of the block 203 . Correspondingly, the block may be an array of M×N (M columns×N rows) pixel points, or an array of M×N transform coefficients, or the like.
在一个实施例中,图2所示的视频编码器20用于逐块对图像17进行编码,例如,对每个块203执行编码和预测。In one embodiment, the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the image 17 block by block, eg, performing encoding and prediction on each block 203 .
在一个实施例中,图2所示的视频编码器20还可以用于使用片(也称为视频片)分割和/或编码图像,其中图像可以使用一个或多个片(通常为不重叠的)进行分割或编码。每个片可包括一个或多个块(例如,编码树单元CTU)或一个或多个块组(例如H.265/HEVC/VVC标准中的编码区块(tile)和VVC标准中的砖(brick)。In one embodiment, the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be used to segment and/or encode an image using slices (also referred to as video slices), where an image may use one or more slices (typically non-overlapping slices) ) for segmentation or encoding. Each slice may include one or more blocks (eg, Coding Tree Unit CTUs) or one or more groups of blocks (eg, coding tiles in the H.265/HEVC/VVC standard and tiles in the VVC standard ( brick).
在一个实施例中,图2所示的视频编码器20还可以用于使用片/编码区块组(也称为视频编码区块组)和/或编码区块(也称为视频编码区块)对图像进行分割和/或编码,其中图像可以使用一个或多个片/编码区块组(通常为不重叠的)进行分割或编码,每个片/编码区块组可包括一个或多个块(例如CTU)或一个或多个编码区块等,其中每个编码区块可以为矩形等形状,可包括一个或多个完整或部分块(例如CTU)。In one embodiment, the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be used to use slice/coding block groups (also referred to as video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (also referred to as video coding blocks) ) to segment and/or encode an image, wherein the image may be segmented or encoded using one or more slices/encoded block groups (usually non-overlapping), each slice/encoded block group may include one or more slices/encoded block groups A block (eg, CTU) or one or more coding blocks, etc., wherein each coding block may be rectangular or the like, and may include one or more full or partial blocks (eg, CTUs).
残差计算residual calculation
残差计算单元204用于通过如下方式根据图像块(或原始块)203和预测块265来计算残差块205(后续详细介绍了预测块265):例如,逐个像素点(逐个像素)从图像块203的像素点值中减去预测块265的像素点值,得到像素域中的残差块205。The residual calculation unit 204 is configured to calculate the residual block 205 (the prediction block 265 will be described in detail later) according to the image block (or original block) 203 and the prediction block 265 in the following manner: for example, pixel by pixel (pixel by pixel) from the image The pixel value of the prediction block 265 is subtracted from the pixel value of the block 203 to obtain the residual block 205 in the pixel domain.
变换transform
变换处理单元206用于对残差块205的像素点值执行离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)或离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform,DST)等,得到变换域中的变换系数207。变换系数207也可称为变换残差系数,表示变换域中的残差块205。The transform processing unit 206 is configured to perform discrete cosine transform (discrete cosine transform, DCT) or discrete sine transform (discrete sine transform, DST) etc. on the pixel point values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain. Transform coefficients 207, which may also be referred to as transform residual coefficients, represent the residual block 205 in the transform domain.
变换处理单元206可用于应用DCT/DST的整数化近似,例如为H.265/HEVC指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比,这种整数化近似通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经过正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数,使用其它比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。 比例缩放因子通常是根据某些约束条件来选择的,例如比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性与实施成本之间的权衡等。例如,在编码器20侧通过逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元312为对应逆变换)指定具体的比例缩放因子,以及相应地,可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。Transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as transforms specified for H.265/HEVC. Compared to the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by some factor. In order to maintain the norm of the forward and inversely transformed residual blocks, other scaling factors are used as part of the transformation process. The scaling factor is usually chosen according to certain constraints, such as the scaling factor being a power of 2 for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficients, the trade-off between accuracy and implementation cost, etc. For example, specific scaling factors are specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 at the encoder 20 side (and for the corresponding inverse transform at the decoder 30 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 312), and accordingly, can be used at the encoder The 20 side specifies the corresponding scaling factor for the forward transformation through the transformation processing unit 206 .
在一个实施例中,视频编码器20(对应地,变换处理单元206)可用于输出一种或多种变换的类型等变换参数,例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270进行编码或压缩后输出,例如使得视频解码器30可接收并使用变换参数进行解码。In one embodiment, the video encoder 20 (correspondingly, the transform processing unit 206 ) may be configured to output transform parameters such as the type of one or more transforms, eg, directly or after being encoded or compressed by the entropy encoding unit 270 , eg, so that video decoder 30 can receive and decode using transform parameters.
量化quantify
量化单元208用于通过例如标量量化或矢量量化对变换系数207进行量化,得到量化变换系数209。量化变换系数209也可称为量化残差系数209。The quantization unit 208 is configured to quantize the transform coefficients 207 by, for example, scalar quantization or vector quantization, to obtain quantized transform coefficients 209 . The quantized transform coefficients 209 may also be referred to as quantized residual coefficients 209 .
量化过程可减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如,可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数,其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)修改量化程度。例如,对于标量量化,可以应用不同程度的比例来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化,而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可通过量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)指示合适的量化步长。例如,量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如,较小的量化参数可对应精细量化(较小量化步长),较大的量化参数可对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长),反之亦然。量化可包括除以量化步长,而反量化单元210等执行的对应或逆解量化可包括乘以量化步长。根据例如HEVC一些标准的实施例可用于使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而言,可以根据量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入其它比例缩放因子来进行量化和解量化,以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的比例而修改的残差块的范数。在一种示例性实现方式中,可以合并逆变换和解量化的比例。或者,可以使用自定义量化表并在比特流中等将其从编码器向解码器指示。量化是有损操作,其中量化步长越大,损耗越大。The quantization process may reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207 . For example, n-bit transform coefficients may be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m. The degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP). For example, with scalar quantization, different degrees of scaling can be applied to achieve finer or coarser quantization. Smaller quantization step sizes correspond to finer quantization, while larger quantization step sizes correspond to coarser quantization. A suitable quantization step size can be indicated by a quantization parameter (QP). For example, the quantization parameter may be an index into a predefined set of suitable quantization step sizes. For example, a smaller quantization parameter may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size), a larger quantization parameter may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size), and vice versa. Quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size, and corresponding or inverse dequantization performed by the inverse quantization unit 210 or the like may include multiplying by the quantization step size. Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may be used to use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size. In general, the quantization step size can be calculated from the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation of an equation involving division. Other scaling factors may be introduced for quantization and dequantization to restore the norm of the residual block, which may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for the quantization step size and quantization parameters. In one exemplary implementation, the inverse transform and dequantized scales may be combined. Alternatively, a custom quantization table can be used and indicated from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream etc. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step size, the larger the loss.
在一个实施例中,视频编码器20(对应地,量化单元208)可用于输出量化参数(quantization parameter,QP),例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270进行编码或压缩后输出,例如使得视频解码器30可接收并使用量化参数进行解码。In one embodiment, the video encoder 20 (correspondingly, the quantization unit 208) may be used to output a quantization parameter (QP), eg, directly or after being encoded or compressed by the entropy encoding unit 270, eg, such that the video Decoder 30 may receive and decode using the quantization parameters.
反量化inverse quantization
反量化单元210用于对量化系数执行量化单元208的反量化,得到解量化系数211,例如,根据或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长执行与量化单元208所执行的量化方案的反量化方案。解量化系数211也可称为解量化残差系数211,对应于变换系数207,但是由于量化造成损耗,反量化系数211通常与变换系数不完全相同。The inverse quantization unit 210 is used to perform inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the dequantized coefficients 211, for example, perform inverse quantization with the quantization scheme performed by the quantization unit 208 according to or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208 plan. Dequantized coefficients 211 may also be referred to as dequantized residual coefficients 211, corresponding to transform coefficients 207, but due to losses caused by quantization, inverse quantized coefficients 211 are usually not identical to transform coefficients.
逆变换Inverse transform
逆变换处理单元212用于执行变换处理单元206执行的变换的逆变换,例如,逆离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)或逆离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform,DST),以在像素域中得到重建残差块213(或对应的解量化系数213)。重建残差块213也可称为变换块213。The inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to perform the inverse transform of the transform performed by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), to A reconstructed residual block 213 (or corresponding dequantized coefficients 213) is obtained. The reconstructed residual block 213 may also be referred to as a transform block 213 .
重建reconstruction
重建单元214(例如,求和器214)用于将变换块213(即重建残差块213)添加到预测块265,以在像素域中得到重建块215,例如,将重建残差块213的像素点值和预测块265的像素点值相加。The reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214 ) is used to add the transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213 ) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the pixel domain, eg, the The pixel value and the pixel value of the prediction block 265 are added.
滤波filter
环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对重建块215进行滤波,得到滤波块221,或通常用于对重建像素点进行滤波以得到滤波像素点值。例如,环路滤波器单元用于顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220可包括一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、像素点自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset,SAO)滤波器或一个或多个其它滤波器,例如自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter,ALF)、噪声抑制滤波器(noise suppression filter,NSF)或任意组合。例如,环路滤波器单元220可以包括去块滤波器、SAO滤波器和ALF滤波器。滤波过程的顺序可以是去块滤波器、SAO滤波器和ALF滤波器。再例如,增加一个称为具有色度缩放的亮度映射(luma mapping with chroma scaling,LMCS)(即自适应环内整形器)的过程。该过程在去块之前执行。再例如,去块滤波过程也可以应用于内部子块边缘,例如仿射子块边缘、ATMVP子块边缘、子块变换(sub-block transform,SBT)边缘和内子部分(intra sub-partition,ISP)边缘。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示为环路滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元220可以实现为环后滤波器。滤波块221也可称为滤波重建块221。The loop filter unit 220 (or "loop filter" 220 for short) is used to filter the reconstruction block 215 to obtain the filter block 221, or generally to filter the reconstructed pixels to obtain filtered pixel values. For example, loop filter units are used to smooth pixel transitions or improve video quality. The loop filter unit 220 may include one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or one or more other filters, such as self- Adaptive loop filter (ALF), noise suppression filter (NSF), or any combination. For example, the loop filter unit 220 may include a deblocking filter, a SAO filter, and an ALF filter. The order of the filtering process can be deblocking filter, SAO filter and ALF filter. As another example, a process called luma mapping with chroma scaling (LMCS) (ie, adaptive in-loop shaper) is added. This process is performed before deblocking. For another example, the deblocking filtering process can also be applied to internal sub-block edges, such as affine sub-block edges, ATMVP sub-block edges, sub-block transform (SBT) edges, and intra sub-partition (ISP) edges. )edge. Although loop filter unit 220 is shown in FIG. 2 as a loop filter, in other configurations, loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter. Filter block 221 may also be referred to as filter reconstruction block 221 .
在一个实施例中,视频编码器20(对应地,环路滤波器单元220)可用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如SAO滤波参数、ALF滤波参数或LMCS参数),例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270进行熵编码后输出,例如使得解码器30可接收并使用相同或不同的环路滤波器参数进行解码。In one embodiment, video encoder 20 (correspondingly, loop filter unit 220) may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, SAO filter parameters, ALF filter parameters, or LMCS parameters), eg, directly or by entropy The encoding unit 270 performs entropy encoding and outputs, eg, so that the decoder 30 can receive and decode using the same or different loop filter parameters.
解码图像缓冲器decoded image buffer
解码图像缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230可以是存储参考图像数据以供视频编码器20在编码视频数据时使用的参考图像存储器。DPB 230可以由多种存储器设备中的任一种形成,例如动态随机存取存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM),包括同步DRAM(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、磁阻RAM(magnetoresistive RAM,MRAM)、电阻RAM(resistive RAM,RRAM)或其它类型的存储设备。解码图像缓冲器230可用于存储一个或多个滤波块221。解码图像缓冲器230还可用于存储同一当前图像或例如之前的重建图像等不同图像的其它之前的滤波块,例如之前重建和滤波的块221,并可提供完整的之前重建即解码图像(和对应参考块和像素点)和/或部分重建的当前图像(和对应参考块和像素点),例如用于帧间预测。解码图像缓冲器230还可用于存储一个或多个未经滤波的重建块215,或一般存储未经滤波的重建像素点,例如,未被环路滤波单元220滤波的重建块215,或未进行任何其它处理的重建块或重建像素点。A decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for use by the video encoder 20 in encoding the video data. DPB 230 may be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM), including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), Resistive RAM (RRAM) or other types of storage devices. Decoded image buffer 230 may be used to store one or more filter blocks 221 . The decoded image buffer 230 may also be used to store other previously filtered blocks of the same current image or a different image, such as a previous reconstructed image, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide a complete previously reconstructed or decoded image (and corresponding reference blocks and pixels) and/or a partially reconstructed current image (and corresponding reference blocks and pixels), eg for inter prediction. The decoded image buffer 230 may also be used to store one or more unfiltered reconstructed blocks 215, or generally unfiltered reconstructed pixels, eg, reconstructed blocks 215 not filtered by the in-loop filtering unit 220, or unfiltered Any other processed reconstructed blocks or reconstructed pixels.
模式选择(分割和预测)Mode selection (segmentation and prediction)
模式选择单元260包括分割单元262、帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254,用于从解码图像缓冲器230或其它缓冲器(例如,列缓冲器,图中未显示)接收或获得原始块203(当前图像17的当前块203)和重建图像数据等原始图像数据,例如,同一(当前)图像和/或一个或多个之前解码图像的滤波和/或未经滤波的重建像素点或重建块。重建图像数据用作帧间预测或帧内预测等预测所需的参考图像数据,以得到预测块265或预测值 265。Mode selection unit 260 includes partition unit 262, inter prediction unit 244, and intra prediction unit 254 for receiving or obtaining original blocks from decoded image buffer 230 or other buffers (eg, column buffers, not shown) 203 (current block 203 of current image 17) and original image data such as reconstructed image data, e.g. filtered and/or unfiltered reconstructed pixels or reconstructions of the same (current) image and/or one or more previously decoded images Piece. The reconstructed image data is used as reference image data required for prediction such as inter prediction or intra prediction to obtain the prediction block 265 or the prediction value 265.
模式选择单元260可用于为当前块(包括不分割)和预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)确定或选择一种分割,生成对应的预测块265,以对残差块205进行计算和对重建块215进行重建。Mode selection unit 260 may be used to determine or select a partition for the current block (including no partition) and prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) to generate a corresponding prediction block 265 for computing and summing the residual block 205. The reconstruction block 215 is reconstructed.
在一个实施例中,模式选择单元260可用于选择分割和预测模式(例如,从模式选择单元260支持的或可用的预测模式中),所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差是指传输或存储中更好的压缩),或者提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销是指传输或存储中更好的压缩),或者同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元260可用于根据码率失真优化(rate distortion Optimization,RDO)确定分割和预测模式,即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式。本文“最佳”、“最低”、“最优”等术语不一定指总体上“最佳”、“最低”、“最优”的,但也可以指满足终止或选择标准的情况,例如,超过或低于阈值的值或其他限制可能导致“次优选择”,但会降低复杂度和处理时间。In one embodiment, mode selection unit 260 may be used to select a partitioning and prediction mode (eg, from among those supported or available by mode selection unit 260) that provides the best match or the smallest residual (minimum Residual refers to better compression in transmission or storage), or provides minimal signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead refers to better compression in transmission or storage), or considers or balances both. The mode selection unit 260 may be configured to determine the segmentation and prediction mode according to rate distortion optimization (RDO), ie select the prediction mode that provides the least rate distortion optimization. The terms "best", "lowest", "optimal", etc. herein do not necessarily refer to "best", "lowest", "optimal" in general, but may also refer to situations where termination or selection criteria are met, for example, Values above or below the threshold or other constraints may result in "sub-optimal choices" but reduce complexity and processing time.
换言之,分割单元262可用于将视频序列中的图像分割为编码树单元(coding tree unit,CTU)序列,CTU 203可进一步被分割成较小的块部分或子块(再次形成块),例如,通过迭代使用四叉树(quad-tree partitioning,QT)分割、二叉树(binary-tree partitioning,BT)分割或三叉树(triple-tree partitioning,TT)分割或其任意组合,并且用于例如对块部分或子块中的每一个执行预测,其中模式选择包括选择分割块203的树结构和选择应用于块部分或子块中的每一个的预测模式。In other words, partition unit 262 may be used to partition pictures in a video sequence into a sequence of coding tree units (CTUs), CTU 203 may be further partitioned into smaller block parts or sub-blocks (blocks again), e.g., Quad-tree partitioning (QT) partitioning, binary-tree partitioning (BT) partitioning, or triple-tree partitioning (TT) partitioning or any combination thereof is used by iteration, and for e.g. Or each of the sub-blocks performs prediction, wherein the mode selection includes selecting the tree structure of the partition block 203 and selecting a prediction mode to apply to each of the block parts or sub-blocks.
下文将详细地描述由视频编码器20执行的分割(例如,由分割单元262执行)和预测处理(例如,由帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254执行)。The segmentation (eg, performed by segmentation unit 262 ) and prediction processing (eg, performed by inter-prediction unit 244 and intra-prediction unit 254 ) performed by video encoder 20 will be described in detail below.
分割segmentation
分割单元262可将一个图像块(或CTU)203分割(或划分)为较小的部分,例如正方形或矩形形状的小块。对于具有三个像素点阵列的图像,一个CTU由N×N个亮度像素点块和两个对应的色度像素点块组成。CTU中亮度块的最大允许大小在正在开发的通用视频编码(versatile video coding,VVC)标准中被指定为128×128,但是将来可指定为不同于128×128的值,例如256×256。图像的CTU可以集中/分组为片/编码区块组、编码区块或砖。一个编码区块覆盖着一个图像的矩形区域,一个编码区块可以分成一个或多个砖。一个砖由一个编码区块内的多个CTU行组成。没有分割为多个砖的编码区块可以称为砖。但是,砖是编码区块的真正子集,因此不称为编码区块。VVC支持两种编码区块组模式,分别为光栅扫描片/编码区块组模式和矩形片模式。在光栅扫描编码区块组模式,一个片/编码区块组包含一个图像的编码区块光栅扫描中的编码区块序列。在矩形片模式中,片包含一个图像的多个砖,这些砖共同组成图像的矩形区域。矩形片内的砖按照片的砖光栅扫描顺序排列。这些较小块(也可称为子块)可进一步分割为更小的部分。这也称为树分割或分层树分割,其中在根树级别0(层次级别0、深度0)等的根块可以递归地分割为两个或两个以上下一个较低树级别的块,例如树级别1(层次级别1、深度1)的节点。这些块可以又分割为两个或两个以上下一个较低级别的块,例如树级别2(层次级别2、深度2)等,直到分割结束(因为满足结束标准,例如达到最大树深度或最小块大小)。未进一步分割的块也称为树的叶块或叶节点。分割为两个部分的树称为二叉树(binary-tree,BT),分割为三个部分的树称为三叉树(ternary-tree,TT),分割为四个部分的树称为四叉树(quad- tree,QT)。The partitioning unit 262 may partition (or divide) an image block (or CTU) 203 into smaller parts, such as square or rectangular shaped pieces. For an image with three pixel arrays, a CTU consists of N×N luminance pixel blocks and two corresponding chrominance pixel blocks. The maximum allowable size of a luma block in a CTU is specified as 128x128 in the developing universal video coding (VVC) standard, but may be specified in the future to a value other than 128x128, such as 256x256. The CTUs of a picture can be aggregated/grouped into slices/coded block groups, coded blocks or bricks. A coding block covers a rectangular area of an image, and a coding block can be divided into one or more tiles. A brick consists of multiple CTU lines within an encoded block. An encoded block that is not divided into multiple bricks can be called a brick. However, bricks are a true subset of coded blocks and are therefore not called coded blocks. VVC supports two encoding block group modes, namely raster scan slice/encoded block group mode and rectangular slice mode. In raster scan coded block group mode, a slice/coded block group contains a sequence of coded blocks in a raster scan of coded blocks of an image. In rectangular slice mode, slices contain multiple tiles of an image that together make up a rectangular area of the image. The tiles within the rectangular slice are arranged in the order of the tile raster scan of the photo. These smaller blocks (also referred to as sub-blocks) may be further divided into smaller parts. This is also known as tree splitting or hierarchical tree splitting, where a root block at root tree level 0 (hierarchy level 0, depth 0) etc. can be recursively split into two or more blocks of the next lower tree level, For example, a node at tree level 1 (hierarchy level 1, depth 1). These blocks can in turn be split into two or more blocks of the next lower level, e.g. tree level 2 (hierarchy level 2, depth 2), etc., until the split ends (since ending criteria are met, such as reaching a maximum tree depth or minimum block size). Blocks that are not further divided are also called leaf blocks or leaf nodes of the tree. A tree divided into two parts is called a binary-tree (BT), a tree divided into three parts is called a ternary-tree (TT), and a tree divided into four parts is called a quadtree ( quad-tree, QT).
例如,编码树单元(CTU)可以为或包括亮度像素点的CTB、具有三个像素点阵列的图像的色度像素点的两个对应CTB、或单色图像的像素点的CTB或使用三个独立颜色平面和语法结构(用于编码像素点)编码的图像的像素点的CTB。相应地,编码树块(CTB)可以为N×N个像素点块,其中N可以设为某个值使得分量划分为CTB,这就是分割。编码单元(coding unit,CU)可以为或包括亮度像素点的编码块、具有三个像素点阵列的图像的色度像素点的两个对应编码块、或单色图像的像素点的编码块或使用三个独立颜色平面和语法结构(用于编码像素点)编码的图像的像素点的编码块。相应地,编码块(CB)可以为M×N个像素点块,其中M和N可以设为某个值使得CTB划分为编码块,这就是分割。For example, a coding tree unit (CTU) may be or include a CTB for luma pixels, two corresponding CTBs for chroma pixels for an image with an array of three pixels, or a CTB for pixels for monochrome images, or a CTB using three The CTB of a pixel of an image encoded by the independent color plane and syntax structure (used to encode the pixel). Correspondingly, a coding tree block (CTB) can be a block of N×N pixel points, where N can be set to a certain value such that the components are divided into CTBs, which is division. A coding unit (CU) may be or include a coding block of luminance pixels, two corresponding coding blocks of chrominance pixels of an image with an array of three pixel points, or a coding block of pixels of a monochrome image, or An encoding block of pixels of an image encoded using three independent color planes and syntax structures (used to encode pixels). Correspondingly, a coding block (CB) can be a block of M×N pixel points, where M and N can be set to a certain value so that the CTB is divided into coding blocks, which is division.
例如,在实施例中,根据HEVC可通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将编码树单元(CTU)划分为多个CU。在叶CU级作出是否使用帧间(时间)预测或帧内(空间)预测对图像区域进行编码的决定。每个叶CU可以根据PU划分类型进一步划分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内使用相同的预测过程,并以PU为单位向解码器传输相关信息。在根据PU划分类型应用预测过程得到残差块之后,可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将叶CU分割为变换单元(TU)。For example, in an embodiment, a coding tree unit (CTU) may be divided into multiple CUs according to HEVC by using a quad-tree structure represented as a coding tree. The decision whether to use inter (temporal) prediction or intra (spatial) prediction to encode image regions is made at the leaf-CU level. Each leaf-CU may be further divided into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU partition type. The same prediction process is used within a PU, and relevant information is transmitted to the decoder on a PU basis. After applying the prediction process to obtain residual blocks according to the PU partition type, the leaf CU may be partitioned into transform units (TUs) according to other quad-tree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU.
例如,在实施例中,根据当前正在开发的最新视频编码标准(称为通用视频编码(VVC),使用嵌套多类型树(例如二叉树和三叉树)的组合四叉树来划分用于分割编码树单元的分段结构。在编码树单元内的编码树结构中,CU可以为正方形或矩形。例如,编码树单元(CTU)首先由四叉树结构进行分割。四叉树叶节点进一步由多类型树结构分割。多类型树形结构有四种划分类型:垂直二叉树划分(SPLIT_BT_VER)、水平二叉树划分(SPLIT_BT_HOR)、垂直三叉树划分(SPLIT_TT_VER)和水平三叉树划分(SPLIT_TT_HOR)。多类型树叶节点称为编码单元(CU),除非CU对于最大变换长度而言太大,这样的分段用于预测和变换处理,无需其它任何分割。在大多数情况下,这表示CU、PU和TU在四叉树嵌套多类型树的编码块结构中的块大小相同。当最大支持变换长度小于CU的彩色分量的宽度或高度时,就会出现该异常。VVC制定了具有四叉树嵌套多类型树的编码结构中的分割划分信息的唯一信令机制。在信令机制中,编码树单元(CTU)作为四叉树的根首先被四叉树结构分割。然后每个四叉树叶节点(当足够大可以被)被进一步分割为一个多类型树结构。在多类型树结构中,通过第一标识(mtt_split_cu_flag)指示节点是否进一步分割,当对节点进一步分割时,先用第二标识(mtt_split_cu_vertical_flag)指示划分方向,再用第三标识(mtt_split_cu_binary_flag)指示划分是二叉树划分或三叉树划分。根据mtt_split_cu_vertical_flag和mtt_split_cu_binary_flag的值,解码器可以基于预定义规则或表格推导出CU的多类型树划分模式(MttSplitMode)。需要说明的是,对于某种设计,例如VVC硬件解码器中的64×64的亮度块和32×32的色度流水线设计,当亮度编码块的宽度或高度大于64时,不允许进行TT划分。当色度编码块的宽度或高度大于32时,也不允许TT划分。流水线设计将图像分为多个虚拟流水线数据单元(virtual pipeline data unit,VPDU),每个VPDU在图像中定义为互不重叠的单元。在硬件解码器中,连续的VPDU在多个流水线阶段同时处理。在大多数流水线阶段,VPDU大小与缓冲器大小大致成正比,因此需要保持较小的VPDU。在大多数硬件解码器中,VPDU大小可以设置为 最大变换块(transform block,TB)大小。但是,在VVC中,三叉树(TT)和二叉树(BT)的分割可能会增加VPDU的大小。For example, in an embodiment, according to the latest video coding standard currently under development, called Versatile Video Coding (VVC), a combined quadtree of nested multi-type trees (eg, binary and ternary trees) is used to partition for segmentation coding The segmented structure of the tree unit.In the coding tree structure in the coding tree unit, the CU can be a square or a rectangle.For example, the coding tree unit (CTU) is first divided by the quad-tree structure.The quad-leaf node is further composed of multiple types of Tree structure division. There are four division types for multi-type tree structures: vertical binary tree division (SPLIT_BT_VER), horizontal binary tree division (SPLIT_BT_HOR), vertical ternary tree division (SPLIT_TT_VER) and horizontal ternary tree division (SPLIT_TT_HOR). Multi-type leaf nodes are called A coding unit (CU), unless the CU is too large for the maximum transform length, such a segment is used for prediction and transform processing without any other partitioning. In most cases, this means that the CU, PU, and TU are The block size is the same in the coding block structure of tree-nested multi-type trees. This exception occurs when the maximum supported transform length is less than the width or height of the color components of the CU. VVC has formulated a multi-type tree with quadtree nesting The only signaling mechanism for partitioning information in the coding structure. In the signaling mechanism, the coding tree unit (CTU) as the root of the quad-tree is first divided by the quad-tree structure. Then each quad-leaf node (when enough can be further divided into a multi-type tree structure. In the multi-type tree structure, whether the node is further divided by the first flag (mtt_split_cu_flag), when the node is further divided, first use the second flag (mtt_split_cu_vertical_flag) to indicate Divide the direction, and then use the third mark (mtt_split_cu_binary_flag) to indicate that the division is binary tree division or ternary tree division. According to the values of mtt_split_cu_vertical_flag and mtt_split_cu_binary_flag, the decoder can derive the multi-type tree division mode (MttSplitMode) of the CU based on a predefined rule or table. It should be noted that for a certain design, such as a 64×64 luma block and a 32×32 chroma pipeline design in a VVC hardware decoder, when the width or height of the luma coding block is greater than 64, TT division is not allowed .When the width or height of the chroma coding block is greater than 32, TT division is also not allowed. The pipeline design divides the image into multiple virtual pipeline data units (VPDUs), and each VPDU is defined in the image as mutual Non-overlapping units. In hardware decoders, consecutive VPDUs are processed simultaneously in multiple pipeline stages. In most pipeline stages, VPDU size is roughly proportional to buffer size, so it is necessary to keep VPDUs small . In most hardware decoders, the VPDU size can be set to the maximum transform block (TB) size. However, in VVC, the partition of ternary tree (TT) and binary tree (BT) may increase the size of VPDU.
另外,需要说明的是,当树节点块的一部分超出底部或图像右边界时,强制对该树节点块进行划分,直到每个编码CU的所有像素点都位于图像边界内。In addition, it should be noted that when a part of the tree node block exceeds the bottom or the right border of the image, the tree node block is forced to be divided until all the pixels of each coded CU are located within the image border.
例如,所述帧内子分割(intra sub-partitions,ISP)工具可以根据块大小将亮度帧内预测块垂直或水平地分为两个或四个子部分。For example, the intra sub-partitions (ISP) tool may divide the luma intra prediction block vertically or horizontally into two or four sub-parts depending on the block size.
在一个示例中,视频编码器20的模式选择单元260可以用于执行上文描述的分割技术的任意组合。In one example, mode selection unit 260 of video encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the partitioning techniques described above.
如上所述,视频编码器20用于从(预定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。As described above, video encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from a set of (predetermined) prediction modes. The set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
帧内预测Intra prediction
帧内预测模式集合可包括35种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,像DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如HEVC定义的方向性模式,或者可包括67种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,像DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如VVC中定义的方向性模式。例如,若干传统角度帧内预测模式自适应地替换为VVC中定义的非正方形块的广角帧内预测模式。又例如,为了避免DC预测的除法运算,仅使用较长边来计算非正方形块的平均值。并且,平面模式的帧内预测结果还可以使用位置决定的帧内预测组合(position dependent intra prediction combination,PDPC)方法修改。The set of intra prediction modes may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes like DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined by HEVC, or may include 67 different Intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes like DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in VVC. For example, several conventional-angle intra-prediction modes are adaptively replaced with wide-angle intra-prediction modes for non-square blocks defined in VVC. As another example, in order to avoid the division operation of DC prediction, only the longer side is used to calculate the average value of the non-square block. In addition, the intra prediction result of the planar mode may also be modified using a position-dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) method.
帧内预测单元254用于根据帧内预测模式集合中的帧内预测模式使用同一当前图像的相邻块的重建像素点来生成帧内预测块265。The intra-frame prediction unit 254 is configured to generate an intra-frame prediction block 265 using reconstructed pixels of adjacent blocks of the same current image according to the intra-frame prediction mode in the intra-frame prediction mode set.
帧内预测单元254(或通常为模式选择单元260)还用于输出帧内预测参数(或通常为指示块的选定帧内预测模式的信息)以语法元素266的形式发送到熵编码单元270,以包含到编码图像数据21中,从而视频解码器30可执行操作,例如接收并使用用于解码的预测参数。Intra-prediction unit 254 (or generally mode selection unit 260 ) is also used to output intra-prediction parameters (or generally information indicating the selected intra-prediction mode of the block) to entropy encoding unit 270 in the form of syntax element 266 , to be included in the encoded image data 21 so that the video decoder 30 may perform operations such as receiving and using prediction parameters for decoding.
HEVC中的帧内预测模式包括直流预测模式,平面预测模式和33种角度预测模式,共计35个候选预测模式。图3为HEVC帧内预测方向示意图,如图3所示,当前块可以使用左侧和上方已重建图像块的像素作为参考进行帧内预测。当前块的周边区域中用来对当前块进行帧内预测的图像块成为参考块,参考块中的像素称为参考像素。35个候选预测模式中,直流预测模式适用于当前块中纹理平坦的区域,该区域中所有像素均使用参考块中的参考像素的平均值作为预测;平面预测模式适用于纹理平滑变化的图像块,符合该条件的当前块使用参考块中的参考像素进行双线性插值作为当前块中的所有像素的预测;角度预测模式利用当前块的纹理与相邻已重建图像块的纹理高度相关的特性,沿某一角度复制对应的参考块中的参考像素的值作为当前块中的所有像素的预测。The intra prediction modes in HEVC include DC prediction mode, plane prediction mode and 33 angle prediction modes, totaling 35 candidate prediction modes. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the HEVC intra prediction direction. As shown in FIG. 3 , the current block can use the pixels of the reconstructed image block on the left and above as a reference for intra prediction. The image block used for intra prediction of the current block in the surrounding area of the current block is called the reference block, and the pixels in the reference block are called reference pixels. Among the 35 candidate prediction modes, the DC prediction mode is suitable for the area with flat texture in the current block, and all pixels in this area use the average value of the reference pixels in the reference block as prediction; the plane prediction mode is suitable for image blocks with smooth texture changes. , the current block that meets this condition uses the reference pixels in the reference block to perform bilinear interpolation as the prediction of all pixels in the current block; the angle prediction mode uses the texture of the current block and the texture of the adjacent reconstructed image blocks. , the value of the reference pixel in the corresponding reference block is copied along a certain angle as the prediction of all pixels in the current block.
HEVC编码器给当前块从图3所示的35个候选预测模式中选择一个最优帧内预测模式,并将该最优帧内预测模式写入视频码流。为提升帧内预测的编码效率,编码器/解码器会从周边区域中、采用帧内预测的已重建图像块各自的最优帧内预测模式中推导出3个最可能模式,如果给当前块选择的最优帧内预测模式是这3个最可能模式的其中之一,则编码一个第一索引指示所选择的最优帧内预测模式是这3个最可能模式的其中之一;如果选中的最优帧内预测模式不是这3个最可能模式,则编码一个第二索引指示所选择的最优帧 内预测模式是其他32个模式(35个候选预测模式中除前述3个最可能模式外的其他模式)的其中之一。HEVC标准使用5比特的定长码作为前述第二索引。The HEVC encoder selects an optimal intra prediction mode from the 35 candidate prediction modes shown in FIG. 3 for the current block, and writes the optimal intra prediction mode into the video code stream. In order to improve the coding efficiency of intra-frame prediction, the encoder/decoder will derive 3 most probable modes from the respective optimal intra-frame prediction modes of the reconstructed image blocks using intra-frame prediction in the surrounding area. The selected optimal intra prediction mode is one of the 3 most probable modes, encoding a first index indicating that the selected optimal intra prediction mode is one of the 3 most probable modes; if selected The optimal intra prediction mode is not these 3 most probable modes, then a second index is encoded to indicate that the selected optimal intra prediction mode is the other 32 modes (in the 35 candidate prediction modes, except the aforementioned 3 most probable modes other modes). The HEVC standard uses a 5-bit fixed-length code as the aforementioned second index.
HEVC编码器推导出3个最可能模式的方法包括:选取当前块的左相邻图像块和上相邻图像块的最优帧内预测模式放入集合,如果这两个最优帧内预测模式相同,则集合中只保留一个即可。如果这两个最优帧内预测模式相同且均为角度预测模式,则再选取与该角度方向邻近的两个角度预测模式加入集合;否则,依次选择平面预测模式、直流模式模式和竖直预测模式加入集合,直到集合中的模式数量达到3。The method for the HEVC encoder to derive the 3 most probable modes includes: selecting the optimal intra prediction modes of the left adjacent image block and the upper adjacent image block of the current block into the set, if the two optimal intra prediction modes If they are the same, only one of them can be kept in the set. If the two optimal intra prediction modes are the same and both are angle prediction modes, then select the two angle prediction modes adjacent to the angle direction to join the set; otherwise, select the plane prediction mode, the DC mode mode and the vertical prediction mode in turn Patterns are added to the collection until the number of patterns in the collection reaches 3.
HEVC解码器对码流做熵解码后,获得当前块的模式信息,该模式信息包括指示当前块的最优帧内预测模式是否在3个最可能模式中的指示标识,以及当前块的最优帧内预测模式在3个最可能模式中的索引或者当前块的最优帧内预测模式在其他32个模式中的索引。After the HEVC decoder performs entropy decoding on the code stream, it obtains the mode information of the current block. The mode information includes an indicator indicating whether the optimal intra prediction mode of the current block is among the three most probable modes, and the optimal intra prediction mode of the current block. The indices of the intra prediction mode in the 3 most probable modes or the indices of the optimal intra prediction mode of the current block in the other 32 modes.
帧间预测Inter prediction
在可能的实现中,帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图像(即,例如前述存储在DBP230中的至少部分之前解码的图像)和其它帧间预测参数,例如取决于是否使用整个参考图像或只使用参考图像的一部分,例如当前块的区域附近的搜索窗口区域,来搜索最佳匹配参考块,和/或例如取决于是否执行半像素、四分之一像素和/或16分之一内插的像素内插。In a possible implementation, the set of inter-prediction modes depends on available reference pictures (ie, eg, at least some of the previously decoded pictures previously stored in DBP 230) and other inter-prediction parameters, eg on whether to use the entire reference picture or only use a portion of the reference image, e.g. the search window area near the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or e.g. depending on whether half-pixel, quarter-pixel and/or 1/16th interpolation is performed pixel interpolation.
除上述预测模式外,还可以采用跳过模式和/或直接模式。In addition to the above prediction modes, skip mode and/or direct mode may also be employed.
例如,扩展合并预测,这个模式的合并候选列表由以下五个候选类型按顺序组成:来自空间相邻CU的空间MVP、来自并置CU的时间MVP、来自FIFO表的基于历史的MVP、成对平均MVP和零MV。可以使用基于双边匹配的解码器侧运动矢量修正(decoder side motion vector refinement,DMVR)来增加合并模式的MV的准确度。带有MVD的合并模式(merge mode with MVD,MMVD)来自有运动矢量差异的合并模式。在发送跳过标志和合并标志之后立即发送MMVD标志,以指定CU是否使用MMVD模式。可以使用CU级自适应运动矢量分辨率(adaptive motion vector resolution,AMVR)方案。AMVR支持CU的MVD以不同的精度进行编码。根据当前CU的预测模式,自适应地选择当前CU的MVD。当CU以合并模式进行编码时,可以将合并的帧间/帧内预测(combined inter/intra prediction,CIIP)模式应用于当前CU。对帧间和帧内预测信号进行加权平均,得到CIIP预测。对于仿射运动补偿预测,通过2个控制点(4参数)或3个控制点(6参数)运动矢量的运动信息来描述块的仿射运动场。基于子块的时间运动矢量预测(subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction,SbTMVP),与HEVC中的时间运动矢量预测(temporal motion vector prediction,TMVP)类似,但预测的是当前CU内的子CU的运动矢量。双向光流(bi-directional optical flow,BDOF)以前称为BIO,是一种减少计算的简化版本,特别是在乘法次数和乘数大小方面的计算。在三角形分割模式中,CU以对角线划分和反对角线划分两种划分方式被均匀划分为两个三角形部分。此外,双向预测模式在简单平均的基础上进行了扩展,以支持两个预测信号的加权平均。For example, extending merge prediction, the merge candidate list for this mode consists of the following five candidate types in order: spatial MVP from spatially adjacent CUs, temporal MVP from collocated CUs, history-based MVP from FIFO table, pairwise Average MVP and zero MV. Decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) based on bilateral matching can be used to increase the accuracy of MV for merge mode. The merge mode with MVD (MMVD) comes from the merge mode with motion vector difference. Send the MMVD flag immediately after sending the skip flag and merge flag to specify whether the CU uses MMVD mode. A CU-level adaptive motion vector resolution (AMVR) scheme may be used. AMVR supports the MVD of the CU to be encoded in different precisions. According to the prediction mode of the current CU, the MVD of the current CU is adaptively selected. When a CU is encoded in combined mode, a combined inter/intra prediction (CIIP) mode may be applied to the current CU. A weighted average is performed on the inter and intra prediction signals to obtain the CIIP prediction. For affine motion compensation prediction, the affine motion field of the block is described by motion information of 2 control points (4 parameters) or 3 control points (6 parameters) motion vectors. Subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) is similar to temporal motion vector prediction (TMVP) in HEVC, but predicts the motion of sub-CUs in the current CU vector. Bi-directional optical flow (BDOF), formerly known as BIO, is a simplified version that reduces computation, especially in terms of the number of multiplications and the size of the multipliers. In the triangular division mode, the CU is evenly divided into two triangular parts in two divisions: diagonal division and anti-diagonal division. In addition, the bidirectional prediction mode is extended on the basis of simple averaging to support weighted average of two prediction signals.
帧间预测单元244可包括运动估计(motion estimation,ME)单元和运动补偿(motion compensation,MC)单元(两者在图2中未示出)。运动估计单元可用于接收或获取图像块203(当前图像17的当前图像块203)和解码图像231,或至少一个或多个之前重建块, 例如,一个或多个其它/不同之前解码图像231的重建块,来进行运动估计。例如,视频序列可包括当前图像和之前的解码图像231,或换句话说,当前图像和之前的解码图像231可以为形成视频序列的图像序列的一部分或形成该图像序列。 Inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit and a motion compensation (MC) unit (both not shown in FIG. 2 ). The motion estimation unit may be used to receive or obtain the image block 203 (the current image block 203 of the current image 17 ) and the decoded image 231 , or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, eg, one or more other/different previously decoded images 231 . Reconstruction blocks for motion estimation. For example, the video sequence may include the current image and the previous decoded image 231, or in other words, the current image and the previous decoded image 231 may be part of or form a sequence of images forming the video sequence.
例如,编码器20可用于从多个其它图像中的同一或不同图像的多个参考块中选择参考块,并将参考图像(或参考图像索引)和/或参考块的位置(x、y坐标)与当前块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数提供给运动估计单元。该偏移也称为运动矢量(motion vector,MV)。For example, the encoder 20 may be operable to select a reference block from a plurality of reference blocks of the same or different pictures among a plurality of other pictures, and convert the reference picture (or reference picture index) and/or the position (x, y coordinates) of the reference block ) and the position of the current block (spatial offset) are provided to the motion estimation unit as inter prediction parameters. This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
运动补偿单元用于获取,例如接收,帧间预测参数,并根据或使用该帧间预测参数执行帧间预测,得到帧间预测块246。由运动补偿单元执行的运动补偿可能包含根据通过运动估计确定的运动/块矢量来提取或生成预测块,还可能包括对子像素精度执行内插。内插滤波可从已知像素的像素点中产生其它像素的像素点,从而潜在地增加可用于对图像块进行编码的候选预测块的数量。一旦接收到当前图像块的PU对应的运动矢量时,运动补偿单元可在其中一个参考图像列表中定位运动矢量指向的预测块。The motion compensation unit is used to obtain, eg, receive, inter-prediction parameters, and perform inter-prediction based on or using the inter-prediction parameters, resulting in the inter-prediction block 246 . The motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit may involve extracting or generating prediction blocks from motion/block vectors determined through motion estimation, and may also include performing interpolation to sub-pixel precision. Interpolative filtering can generate pixels of other pixels from pixels of known pixels, thereby potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode an image block. Once the motion vector corresponding to the PU of the current image block is received, the motion compensation unit may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in one of the reference image lists.
运动补偿单元还可以生成与块和视频片相关的语法元素,以供视频解码器30在解码视频片的图像块时使用。此外,或者作为片和相应语法元素的替代,可以生成或使用编码区块组和/或编码区块以及相应语法元素。The motion compensation unit may also generate block- and video slice-related syntax elements for use by video decoder 30 in decoding image blocks of the video slice. In addition, or instead of slices and corresponding syntax elements, coding block groups and/or coding blocks and corresponding syntax elements may be generated or used.
在获取先进的运动矢量预测(advanced motion vector prediction,AMVP)模式中的候选运动矢量列表的过程中,作为备选可以加入候选运动矢量列表的运动矢量(motion vector,MV)包括当前块的空域相邻和时域相邻的图像块的MV,其中空域相邻的图像块的MV又可以包括位于当前块左侧的左方候选图像块的MV和位于当前块上方的上方候选图像块的MV。示例性的,图7为本申请实施例的候选图像块的示例性的示意图,如图7所示,左方候选图像块的集合包括{A0,A1},上方候选图像块的集合包括{B0,B1,B2},时域相邻的候选图像块的集合包括{C,T},这三个集合均可以作为备选被加入到候选运动矢量列表中,但是根据现有编码标准,AMVP的候选运动矢量列表的最大长度为2,因此需要根据规定的顺序从三个集合中确定在候选运动矢量列表中加入最多两个图像块的MV。该顺序可以是优先考虑当前块的左方候选图像块的集合{A0,A1}(先考虑A0,A0不可得再考虑A1),其次考虑当前块的上方候选图像块的集合{B0,B1,B2}(先考虑B0,B0不可得再考虑B1,B1不可得再考虑B2),最后考虑当前块的时域相邻的候选图像块的集合{C,T}(先考虑T,T不可得再考虑C)。In the process of acquiring the candidate motion vector list in the advanced motion vector prediction (advanced motion vector prediction, AMVP) mode, the motion vector (motion vector, MV) that can be added to the candidate motion vector list as an alternative includes the spatial phase phase of the current block. The MVs of adjacent and temporally adjacent image blocks, wherein the MVs of spatially adjacent image blocks may in turn include the MVs of the left candidate image block located to the left of the current block and the MV of the upper candidate image block located above the current block. Exemplarily, FIG. 7 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a candidate image block according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the set of candidate image blocks on the left includes {A0, A1}, and the set of candidate image blocks on the upper side includes {B0 , B1, B2}, the set of temporally adjacent candidate image blocks includes {C, T}, these three sets can be added to the candidate motion vector list as candidates, but according to the existing coding standard, AMVP's The maximum length of the candidate motion vector list is 2, so it is necessary to determine the MVs for adding at most two image blocks to the candidate motion vector list from the three sets according to the specified order. The order may be to give priority to the set {A0, A1} of candidate image blocks on the left of the current block (consider A0 first, and then consider A1 when A0 is unavailable), and secondly consider the set of candidate image blocks above the current block {B0, B1, B2} (consider B0 first, if B0 is unavailable, then consider B1, if B1 is unavailable, then consider B2), and finally consider the set {C, T} of candidate image blocks adjacent to the current block in the temporal domain (consider T first, T is unavailable) Consider C).
得到上述候选运动矢量列表后,通过率失真代价(rate distortion cost,RD cost)从候选运动矢量列表中确定最优的MV,将RD cost最小的候选运动矢量作为当前块的运动矢量预测值(motion vector predictor,MVP)。率失真代价由以下公式计算获得:After the above candidate motion vector list is obtained, the optimal MV is determined from the candidate motion vector list through rate distortion cost (RD cost), and the candidate motion vector with the smallest RD cost is used as the motion vector predictor (motion vector) of the current block. vector predictor, MVP). The rate-distortion cost is calculated by the following formula:
J=SAD+λRJ=SAD+λR
其中,J表示RD cost,SAD为使用候选运动矢量进行运动估计后得到的预测块的像素值与当前块的像素值之间的绝对误差和(sum of absolute differences,SAD),R表示码率,λ表示拉格朗日乘子。Among them, J represents RD cost, SAD is the sum of absolute errors (sum of absolute differences, SAD) between the pixel value of the prediction block obtained after motion estimation using the candidate motion vector and the pixel value of the current block, R represents the code rate, λ denotes the Lagrange multiplier.
编码端将确定出的MVP在候选运动矢量列表中的索引传递到解码端。进一步地,可以在MVP为中心的邻域内进行运动搜索获得当前块实际的运动矢量,编码端计算MVP与实际的运动矢量之间的运动矢量差值(motion vector difference,MVD),并将MVD也 传递到解码端。解码端解析索引,根据该索引在候选运动矢量列表中找到对应的MVP,解析MVD,将MVD与MVP相加得到当前块实际的运动矢量。The encoder transmits the determined index of the MVP in the candidate motion vector list to the decoder. Further, a motion search can be performed in the neighborhood centered on the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current block, and the encoder calculates the motion vector difference (motion vector difference, MVD) between the MVP and the actual motion vector, and uses the MVD to passed to the decoder. The decoding end parses the index, finds the corresponding MVP in the candidate motion vector list according to the index, parses the MVD, and adds the MVD and the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current block.
在获取融合(Merge)模式中的候选运动信息列表的过程中,作为备选可以加入候选运动信息列表的运动信息包括当前块的空域相邻或时域相邻的图像块的运动信息,其中空域相邻的图像块和时域相邻的图像块可参照图7,候选运动信息列表中对应于空域的候选运动信息来自于空间相邻的5个块(A0、A1、B0、B1和B2),若空域相邻块不可得或者为帧内预测,则其运动信息不加入候选运动信息列表。当前块的时域的候选运动信息根据参考帧和当前帧的图序计数(picture order count,POC)对参考帧中对应位置块的MV进行缩放后获得,先判断参考帧中位置为T的块是否可得,若不可得则选择位置为C的块。得到上述候选运动信息列表后,通过RD cost从候选运动信息列表中确定最优的运动信息作为当前块的运动信息。编码端将最优的运动信息在候选运动信息列表中位置的索引值(记为merge index)传递到解码端。In the process of acquiring the candidate motion information list in the merge mode, the motion information that can be added to the candidate motion information list as an alternative includes the motion information of the spatially adjacent or temporally adjacent image blocks of the current block, wherein the spatial domain For adjacent image blocks and adjacent image blocks in the temporal domain, refer to Figure 7. The candidate motion information corresponding to the spatial domain in the candidate motion information list comes from the 5 spatially adjacent blocks (A0, A1, B0, B1, and B2) , if the adjacent blocks in the spatial domain are unavailable or are intra-frame predictions, their motion information is not added to the candidate motion information list. The candidate motion information in the temporal domain of the current block is obtained by scaling the MV of the corresponding position block in the reference frame according to the picture order count (POC) of the reference frame and the current frame. First, determine the block whose position is T in the reference frame. Whether it is available, if not, select the block at position C. After obtaining the above candidate motion information list, determine the optimal motion information from the candidate motion information list through RD cost as the motion information of the current block. The encoder transmits the index value of the position of the optimal motion information in the candidate motion information list (denoted as merge index) to the decoder.
熵编码Entropy coding
熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如,可变长度编码(variable length coding,VLC)方案、上下文自适应VLC方案(context adaptive VLC,CALVC)、算术编码方案、二值化算法、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(context adaptive binary arithmetic coding,CABAC)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding,SBAC)、概率区间分割熵(probability interval partitioning entropy,PIPE)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素,得到可以通过输出端272以编码比特流21等形式输出的编码图像数据21,使得视频解码器30等可以接收并使用用于解码的参数。可将编码比特流21传输到视频解码器30,或将其保存在存储器中稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。The entropy coding unit 270 is used for entropy coding algorithm or scheme (for example, variable length coding (variable length coding, VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC scheme (context adaptive VLC, CALVC), arithmetic coding scheme, binarization algorithm, Context adaptive binary arithmetic coding (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding, CABAC), syntax-based context adaptive binary arithmetic coding (syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding, SBAC), probability interval partitioning entropy (probability interval partitioning entropy, PIPE) ) coding or other entropy coding method or technique) is applied to the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements, resulting in an encoded bit stream that can be passed through output 272 The encoded image data 21 output in the form of 21 or the like, so that the video decoder 30 or the like can receive and use the parameters for decoding. The encoded bitstream 21 may be transmitted to the video decoder 30, or stored in memory for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30.
视频编码器20的其它结构变体可用于对视频流进行编码。例如,基于非变换的编码器20可以在某些块或帧没有变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一种实现方式中,编码器20可以具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和反量化单元210。Other structural variations of video encoder 20 may be used to encode the video stream. For example, the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames. In another implementation, encoder 20 may have quantization unit 208 and inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
解码器和解码方法Decoders and Decoding Methods
图3为本申请实施例的视频解码器30的示例性框图。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的编码图像数据21(例如编码比特流21),得到解码图像331。编码图像数据或比特流包括用于解码所述编码图像数据的信息,例如表示编码视频片(和/或编码区块组或编码区块)的图像块的数据和相关的语法元素。FIG. 3 is an exemplary block diagram of a video decoder 30 according to an embodiment of the present application. The video decoder 30 is adapted to receive the encoded image data 21 (eg, the encoded bitstream 21 ) encoded by the encoder 20 , for example, to obtain a decoded image 331 . The encoded image data or bitstream includes information for decoding the encoded image data, such as data representing image blocks of an encoded video slice (and/or encoded block groups or encoded blocks) and associated syntax elements.
在图3的示例中,解码器30包括熵解码单元304、反量化单元310、逆变换处理单元312、重建单元314(例如求和器314)、环路滤波器320、解码图像缓冲器(DBP)330、模式应用单元360、帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354。帧间预测单元344可以为或包括运动补偿单元。在一些示例中,视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器100描述的编码过程相反的解码过程。In the example of FIG. 3, decoder 30 includes entropy decoding unit 304, inverse quantization unit 310, inverse transform processing unit 312, reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314), loop filter 320, decoded image buffer (DBP) ) 330 , a mode application unit 360 , an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354 . Inter prediction unit 344 may be or include a motion compensation unit. In some examples, video decoder 30 may perform a decoding process that is substantially the inverse of the encoding process described with reference to video encoder 100 of FIG. 2 .
参见图3,帧间预测单元包括为经过训练的目标模型(亦称为神经网络),该神经网络用于处理输入图像或图像区域或图像块,以生成输入图像块的预测值。例如,用于帧间预测的神经网络用于接收输入的图像或图像区域或图像块,并且生成输入的图像或图像区 域或图像块的预测值。下面将结合图6a-图6e详细地描述用于帧间预测的神经网络。Referring to FIG. 3, the inter prediction unit includes a trained target model (also called a neural network) for processing an input image or image region or image patch to generate predicted values for the input image patch. For example, a neural network for inter prediction is used to receive an input image or image region or image patch, and generate a predicted value for the input image or image region or image patch. The neural network for inter prediction will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 6a-6e.
如编码器20所述,反量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重建单元214、环路滤波器220、解码图像缓冲器DPB230、帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354还组成视频编码器20的“内置解码器”。相应地,反量化单元310在功能上可与反量化单元110相同,逆变换处理单元312在功能上可与逆变换处理单元122相同,重建单元314在功能上可与重建单元214相同,环路滤波器320在功能上可与环路滤波器220相同,解码图像缓冲器330在功能上可与解码图像缓冲器230相同。因此,视频编码器20的相应单元和功能的解释相应地适用于视频解码器30的相应单元和功能。As described in the encoder 20, the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 214, the loop filter 220, the decoded image buffer DPB 230, the inter prediction unit 344 and the intra prediction unit 354 also constitute a video encoder 20 "built-in decoders". Accordingly, the inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 122, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the loop Filter 320 may be functionally identical to loop filter 220 , and decoded image buffer 330 may be functionally identical to decoded image buffer 230 . Therefore, the explanations of the corresponding units and functions of the video encoder 20 apply correspondingly to the corresponding units and functions of the video decoder 30 .
熵解码Entropy decoding
熵解码单元304用于解析比特流21(或一般为编码图像数据21)并对编码图像数据21执行熵解码,得到量化系数309和/或解码后的编码参数(图3中未示出)等,例如帧间预测参数(例如参考图像索引和运动矢量)、帧内预测参数(例如帧内预测模式或索引)、变换参数、量化参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素等中的任一个或全部。熵解码单元304可用于应用编码器20的熵编码单元270的编码方案对应的解码算法或方案。熵解码单元304还可用于向模式应用单元360提供帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素,以及向解码器30的其它单元提供其它参数。视频解码器30可以接收视频片和/或视频块级的语法元素。此外,或者作为片和相应语法元素的替代,可以接收或使用编码区块组和/或编码区块以及相应语法元素。The entropy decoding unit 304 is used to parse the bit stream 21 (or generally the encoded image data 21 ) and perform entropy decoding on the encoded image data 21 to obtain quantization coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3 ), etc. , such as in inter prediction parameters (such as reference picture indices and motion vectors), intra prediction parameters (such as intra prediction mode or index), transform parameters, quantization parameters, loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements, etc. any or all. The entropy decoding unit 304 may be configured to apply a decoding algorithm or scheme corresponding to the encoding scheme of the entropy encoding unit 270 of the encoder 20 . Entropy decoding unit 304 may also be used to provide inter-prediction parameters, intra-prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to mode application unit 360 , as well as other parameters to other units of decoder 30 . Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice and/or video block level. In addition, or instead of slices and corresponding syntax elements, encoded block groups and/or encoded blocks and corresponding syntax elements may be received or used.
反量化inverse quantization
反量化单元310可用于从编码图像数据21(例如通过熵解码单元304解析和/或解码)接收量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)(或一般为与反量化相关的信息)和量化系数,并基于所述量化参数对所述解码的量化系数309进行反量化以获得反量化系数311,所述反量化系数311也可以称为变换系数311。反量化过程可包括使用视频编码器20为视频片中的每个视频块计算的量化参数来确定量化程度,同样也确定需要执行的反量化的程度。Inverse quantization unit 310 may be operable to receive quantization parameters (QPs) (or information related to inverse quantization in general) and quantization coefficients from encoded image data 21 (eg, parsed and/or decoded by entropy decoding unit 304), and based on The quantization parameters inverse quantize the decoded quantized coefficients 309 to obtain inverse quantized coefficients 311 , which may also be referred to as transform coefficients 311 . The inverse quantization process may include using quantization parameters calculated by video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization, as well as the degree of inverse quantization that needs to be performed.
逆变换Inverse transform
逆变换处理单元312可用于接收解量化系数311,也称为变换系数311,并对解量化系数311应用变换以得到像素域中的重建残差块213。重建残差块213也可称为变换块313。变换可以为逆变换,例如逆DCT、逆DST、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程。逆变换处理单元312还可以用于从编码图像数据21(例如通过熵解码单元304解析和/或解码)接收变换参数或相应信息,以确定应用于解量化系数311的变换。An inverse transform processing unit 312 may be operable to receive dequantized coefficients 311, also referred to as transform coefficients 311, and apply a transform to the dequantized coefficients 311 to obtain a reconstructed residual block 213 in the pixel domain. The reconstructed residual block 213 may also be referred to as a transform block 313 . The transform may be an inverse transform, such as an inverse DCT, an inverse DST, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process. Inverse transform processing unit 312 may also be operable to receive transform parameters or corresponding information from encoded image data 21 (eg, parsed and/or decoded by entropy decoding unit 304 ) to determine transforms to apply to dequantized coefficients 311 .
重建reconstruction
重建单元314(例如,求和器314)用于将重建残差块313添加到预测块365,以在像素域中得到重建块315,例如,将重建残差块313的像素点值和预测块365的像素点值相加。The reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the reconstructed residual block 313 to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the pixel domain, for example, the pixel point values of the reconstructed residual block 313 and the prediction block 365 pixel values are added.
滤波filter
环路滤波器单元320(在编码环路中或之后)用于对重建块315进行滤波,得到滤波块321,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量等。环路滤波器单元320可包括一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、像素点自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset,SAO)滤波 器或一个或多个其它滤波器,例如自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter,ALF)、噪声抑制滤波器(noise suppression filter,NSF)或任意组合。例如,环路滤波器单元220可以包括去块滤波器、SAO滤波器和ALF滤波器。滤波过程的顺序可以是去块滤波器、SAO滤波器和ALF滤波器。再例如,增加一个称为具有色度缩放的亮度映射(luma mapping with chroma scaling,LMCS)(即自适应环内整形器)的过程。该过程在去块之前执行。再例如,去块滤波过程也可以应用于内部子块边缘,例如仿射子块边缘、ATMVP子块边缘、子块变换(sub-block transform,SBT)边缘和内子部分(intra sub-partition,ISP)边缘。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示为环路滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元320可以实现为环后滤波器。The loop filter unit 320 (in or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstruction block 315 to obtain a filter block 321, so as to smoothly perform pixel transitions or improve video quality, etc. The loop filter unit 320 may include one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or one or more other filters, such as a self- Adaptive loop filter (ALF), noise suppression filter (NSF), or any combination. For example, the loop filter unit 220 may include a deblocking filter, a SAO filter, and an ALF filter. The order of the filtering process can be deblocking filter, SAO filter and ALF filter. As another example, a process called luma mapping with chroma scaling (LMCS) (ie, adaptive in-loop shaper) is added. This process is performed before deblocking. For another example, the deblocking filtering process can also be applied to internal sub-block edges, such as affine sub-block edges, ATMVP sub-block edges, sub-block transform (SBT) edges, and intra sub-partition (ISP) edges. )edge. Although loop filter unit 320 is shown in FIG. 3 as a loop filter, in other configurations, loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
解码图像缓冲器decoded image buffer
随后将一个图像中的解码视频块321存储在解码图像缓冲器330中,解码图像缓冲器330存储作为参考图像的解码图像331,参考图像用于其它图像和/或分别输出显示的后续运动补偿。The decoded video block 321 in one picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 which stores the decoded picture 331 as a reference picture for subsequent motion compensation of other pictures and/or output display respectively.
解码器30用于通过输出端312等输出解码图像311,向用户显示或供用户查看。The decoder 30 is configured to output the decoded image 311 through the output terminal 312, etc., to display to the user or for the user to view.
预测predict
帧间预测单元344在功能上可与帧间预测单元244(特别是运动补偿单元)相同,帧内预测单元354在功能上可与帧间预测单元254相同,并基于从编码图像数据21(例如通过熵解码单元304解析和/或解码)接收的分割和/或预测参数或相应信息决定划分或分割和执行预测。模式应用单元360可用于根据重建图像、块或相应的像素点(已滤波或未滤波)执行每个块的预测(帧内或帧间预测),得到预测块365。The inter prediction unit 344 may be functionally the same as the inter prediction unit 244 (in particular, the motion compensation unit), the intra prediction unit 354 may be functionally the same as the inter prediction unit 254, and is based on the encoded image data 21 (eg, The received partitioning and/or prediction parameters or corresponding information are parsed and/or decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304 to decide the partitioning or partitioning and perform prediction. The mode application unit 360 may be configured to perform prediction (intra or inter prediction) of each block according to the reconstructed image, block or corresponding pixel points (filtered or unfiltered), resulting in a prediction block 365 .
当将视频片编码为帧内编码(intra coded,I)片时,模式应用单元360中的帧内预测单元354用于根据指示的帧内预测模式和来自当前图像的之前解码块的数据生成用于当前视频片的图像块的预测块365。当视频图像编码为帧间编码(即,B或P)片时,模式应用单元360中的帧间预测单元344(例如运动补偿单元)用于根据运动矢量和从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频片的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测,可从其中一个参考图像列表中的其中一个参考图像产生这些预测块。视频解码器30可以根据存储在DPB 330中的参考图像,使用默认构建技术来构建参考帧列表0和列表1。除了片(例如视频片)或作为片的替代,相同或类似的过程可应用于编码区块组(例如视频编码区块组)和/或编码区块(例如视频编码区块)的实施例,例如视频可以使用I、P或B编码区块组和/或编码区块进行编码。When encoding a video slice as an intra-coded (I) slice, the intra-prediction unit 354 in the mode application unit 360 is used to generate data based on the indicated intra-prediction mode and data from previously decoded blocks of the current image. Prediction block 365 for an image block of the current video slice. When a video image is encoded as an inter-coded (ie, B or P) slice, an inter-prediction unit 344 (eg, a motion compensation unit) in the mode application unit 360 is used to decode the motion vector and other syntax received from the entropy decoding unit 304 according to the motion vector The element generates a prediction block 365 for a video block of the current video slice. For inter prediction, these prediction blocks may be generated from one of the reference pictures in one of the reference picture lists. Video decoder 30 may construct reference frame List 0 and List 1 from reference pictures stored in DPB 330 using default construction techniques. In addition to or instead of slices (eg, video slices), the same or similar process may be applied to embodiments of coding block groups (eg, video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (eg, video coding blocks), For example, video may be encoded using I, P, or B encoding block groups and/or encoding blocks.
模式应用单元360用于通过解析运动矢量和其它语法元素,确定用于当前视频片的视频块的预测信息,并使用预测信息产生用于正在解码的当前视频块的预测块。例如,模式应用单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频片的视频块的预测模式(例如帧内预测或帧间预测)、帧间预测片类型(例如B片、P片或GPB片)、用于片的一个或多个参考图像列表的构建信息、用于片的每个帧间编码视频块的运动矢量、用于片的每个帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态、其它信息,以解码当前视频片内的视频块。除了片(例如视频片)或作为片的替代,相同或类似的过程可应用于编码区块组(例如视频编码区块组)和/或编码区块(例如视频编码区块)的实施例,例如视频可以使用I、P或B编码区块组和/或编码区块进行编码。 Mode application unit 360 is operable to determine prediction information for a video block of the current video slice by parsing motion vectors and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate a prediction block for the current video block being decoded. For example, mode applying unit 360 uses some of the received syntax elements to determine a prediction mode (eg, intra-prediction or inter-prediction), an inter-prediction slice type (eg, B-slice, P-slice, or GPB for encoding a video block of the video slice) slice), construction information for one or more reference picture lists of the slice, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block of the slice, inter-prediction status for each inter-coded video block of the slice, other information to decode video blocks within the current video slice. In addition to or instead of slices (eg, video slices), the same or similar process may be applied to embodiments of coding block groups (eg, video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (eg, video coding blocks), For example, video may be encoded using I, P, or B encoding block groups and/or encoding blocks.
在一个实施例中,图3的视频编码器30还可以用于使用片(也称为视频片)分割和/或解码图像,其中图像可以使用一个或多个片(通常为不重叠的)进行分割或解码。每个片可包括一个或多个块(例如CTU)或一个或多个块组(例如H.265/HEVC/VVC标准中的编码区块和VVC标准中的砖。In one embodiment, the video encoder 30 of FIG. 3 may also be used to segment and/or decode an image using slices (also referred to as video slices), where an image may be performed using one or more slices (usually non-overlapping) Split or decode. Each slice may include one or more blocks (eg, CTUs) or one or more groups of blocks (eg, coded blocks in the H.265/HEVC/VVC standard and bricks in the VVC standard.
在一个实施例中,图3所示的视频解码器30还可以用于使用片/编码区块组(也称为视频编码区块组)和/或编码区块(也称为视频编码区块)对图像进行分割和/或解码,其中图像可以使用一个或多个片/编码区块组(通常为不重叠的)进行分割或解码,每个片/编码区块组可包括一个或多个块(例如CTU)或一个或多个编码区块等,其中每个编码区块可以为矩形等形状,可包括一个或多个完整或部分块(例如CTU)。In one embodiment, the video decoder 30 shown in FIG. 3 may also be used to use slice/coding block groups (also referred to as video coding block groups) and/or coding blocks (also referred to as video coding blocks) ) to segment and/or decode an image, wherein the image may be segmented or decoded using one or more slices/encoded block groups (usually non-overlapping), each slice/encoded block group may include one or more A block (eg, CTU) or one or more coding blocks, etc., wherein each coding block may be rectangular or the like, and may include one or more full or partial blocks (eg, CTUs).
视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对编码图像数据21进行解码。例如,解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下产生输出视频流。例如,基于非变换的解码器30可以在某些块或帧没有逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接反量化残差信号。在另一种实现方式中,视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的反量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。Other variations of the video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded image data 21 . For example, decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without loop filter unit 320 . For example, the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inverse quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames. In another implementation, video decoder 30 may have inverse quantization unit 310 and inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
应理解,在编码器20和解码器30中,可以对当前步骤的处理结果进一步处理,然后输出到下一步骤。例如,在插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波之后,可以对插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波的处理结果进行进一步的运算,例如裁剪(clip)或移位(shift)运算。It should be understood that in the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, the processing result of the current step can be further processed, and then output to the next step. For example, after interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, further operations, such as clip or shift operations, may be performed on the processing results of interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering.
应该注意的是,可以对当前块的推导运动矢量(包括但不限于仿射模式的控制点运动矢量、仿射、平面、ATMVP模式的子块运动矢量、时间运动矢量等)进行进一步运算。例如,根据运动矢量的表示位将运动矢量的值限制在预定义范围。如果运动矢量的表示位为bitDepth,则范围为-2^(bitDepth-1)至2^(bitDepth-1)-1,其中“^”表示幂次方。例如,如果bitDepth设置为16,则范围为-32768~32767;如果bitDepth设置为18,则范围为-131072~131071。例如,推导运动矢量的值(例如一个8×8块中的4个4×4子块的MV)被限制,使得所述4个4×4子块MV的整数部分之间的最大差值不超过N个像素,例如不超过1个像素。这里提供了两种根据bitDepth限制运动矢量的方法。It should be noted that further operations may be performed on the derived motion vectors of the current block (including but not limited to control point motion vectors in affine mode, affine, plane, sub-block motion vectors in ATMVP mode, temporal motion vectors, etc.). For example, the value of the motion vector is limited to a predefined range according to the representation bits of the motion vector. If the representation bit of the motion vector is bitDepth, the range is -2^(bitDepth-1) to 2^(bitDepth-1)-1, where "^" represents a power. For example, if bitDepth is set to 16, the range is -32768 to 32767; if bitDepth is set to 18, the range is -131072 to 131071. For example, the value of the derived motion vector (eg, the MVs of four 4x4 subblocks in an 8x8 block) is limited such that the maximum difference between the integer parts of the four 4x4 subblock MVs does not More than N pixels, eg no more than 1 pixel. There are two ways to limit motion vectors based on bitDepth.
尽管上述实施例主要描述了视频编解码,但应注意的是,译码系统10、编码器20和解码器30的实施例以及本文描述的其它实施例也可以用于静止图像处理或编解码,即视频编解码中独立于任何先前或连续图像的单个图像的处理或编解码。一般情况下,如果图像处理仅限于单个图像17,帧间预测单元244(编码器)和帧间预测单元344(解码器)可能不可用。视频编码器20和视频解码器30的所有其它功能(也称为工具或技术)同样可用于静态图像处理,例如残差计算204/304、变换206、量化208、反量化210/310、(逆)变换212/312、分割262/362、帧内预测254/354和/或环路滤波220/320、熵编码270和熵解码304。Although the above embodiments have primarily described video codecs, it should be noted that embodiments of the coding system 10, encoder 20 and decoder 30, as well as other embodiments described herein, may also be used for still image processing or codecs, That is, the processing or coding of a single image in video codecs that is independent of any previous or consecutive images. In general, if image processing is limited to a single image 17, inter prediction unit 244 (encoder) and inter prediction unit 344 (decoder) may not be available. All other functions (also referred to as tools or techniques) of video encoder 20 and video decoder 30 are also available for still image processing, such as residual calculation 204/304, transform 206, quantization 208, inverse quantization 210/310, (inverse ) transform 212/312, partition 262/362, intra prediction 254/354 and/or loop filtering 220/320, entropy encoding 270 and entropy decoding 304.
图4为本申请实施例的视频译码设备400的示例性框图。视频译码设备400适用于实现本文描述的公开实施例。在一个实施例中,视频译码设备400可以是解码器,例如图1a中的视频解码器30,也可以是编码器,例如图1a中的视频编码器20。FIG. 4 is an exemplary block diagram of a video coding apparatus 400 according to an embodiment of the present application. Video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the disclosed embodiments described herein. In one embodiment, the video coding apparatus 400 may be a decoder, such as the video decoder 30 in FIG. 1a, or an encoder, such as the video encoder 20 in FIG. 1a.
视频译码设备400包括:用于接收数据的入端口410(或输入端口410)和接收单元(receiver unit,Rx)420;用于处理数据的处理器、逻辑单元或中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)430;例如,这里的处理器430可以是神经网络处理器430;用于传输数据的 发送单元(transmitter unit,Tx)440和出端口450(或输出端口450);用于存储数据的存储器460。视频译码设备400还可包括耦合到入端口410、接收单元420、发送单元440和出端口450的光电(optical-to-electrical,OE)组件和电光(electrical-to-optical,EO)组件,用于光信号或电信号的出口或入口。The video decoding apparatus 400 includes: an input port 410 (or input port 410) for receiving data and a receiver unit (receiver unit, Rx) 420; a processor, a logic unit or a central processing unit (central processing unit) for processing data , CPU) 430; for example, the processor 430 here can be a neural network processor 430; a transmitter unit (transmitter unit, Tx) 440 for transmitting data and an output port 450 (or output port 450); memory 460. The video coding apparatus 400 may also include optical-to-electrical (OE) components and electrical-to-optical (EO) components coupled to the input port 410, the receiving unit 420, the transmitting unit 440, and the output port 450, Exit or entrance for optical or electrical signals.
处理器430通过硬件和软件实现。处理器430可实现为一个或多个处理器芯片、核(例如,多核处理器)、FPGA、ASIC和DSP。处理器430与入端口410、接收单元420、发送单元440、出端口450和存储器460通信。处理器430包括译码模块470(例如,基于神经网络的译码模块470)。译码模块470实施上文所公开的实施例。例如,译码模块470执行、处理、准备或提供各种编码操作。因此,通过译码模块470为视频译码设备400的功能提供了实质性的改进,并且影响了视频译码设备400到不同状态的切换。或者,以存储在存储器460中并由处理器430执行的指令来实现译码模块470。The processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software. Processor 430 may be implemented as one or more processor chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGAs, ASICs, and DSPs. The processor 430 communicates with the ingress port 410 , the receiving unit 420 , the sending unit 440 , the egress port 450 and the memory 460 . The processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (eg, a neural network-based decoding module 470). The decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed above. For example, the transcoding module 470 performs, processes, prepares or provides various encoding operations. Thus, a substantial improvement in the functionality of the video coding apparatus 400 is provided by the coding module 470, and switching of the video coding apparatus 400 to different states is affected. Alternatively, decoding module 470 is implemented as instructions stored in memory 460 and executed by processor 430 .
存储器460包括一个或多个磁盘、磁带机和固态硬盘,可以用作溢出数据存储设备,用于在选择执行程序时存储此类程序,并且存储在程序执行过程中读取的指令和数据。存储器460可以是易失性和/或非易失性的,可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、三态内容寻址存储器(ternary content-addressable memory,TCAM)和/或静态随机存取存储器(static random-access memory,SRAM)。 Memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state drives, and may serve as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when such programs are selected for execution, and for storing instructions and data read during program execution. Memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), ternary content addressable memory (ternary) content-addressable memory, TCAM) and/or static random-access memory (SRAM).
图5为本申请实施例的装置500的示例性框图,装置500可用作图1a中的源设备12和目的设备14中的任一个或两个。FIG. 5 is an exemplary block diagram of an apparatus 500 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the apparatus 500 can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1a.
装置500中的处理器502可以是中央处理器。或者,处理器502可以是现有的或今后将研发出的能够操控或处理信息的任何其它类型设备或多个设备。虽然可以使用如图所示的处理器502等单个处理器来实施已公开的实现方式,但使用一个以上的处理器速度更快和效率更高。The processor 502 in the apparatus 500 may be a central processing unit. Alternatively, the processor 502 may be any other type of device or devices, existing or to be developed in the future, capable of manipulating or processing information. Although the disclosed implementations may be implemented using a single processor, such as processor 502 as shown, using more than one processor is faster and more efficient.
在一种实现方式中,装置500中的存储器504可以是只读存储器(ROM)设备或随机存取存储器(RAM)设备。任何其它合适类型的存储设备都可以用作存储器504。存储器504可以包括处理器502通过总线512访问的代码和数据506。存储器504还可包括操作系统508和应用程序510,应用程序510包括允许处理器502执行本文所述方法的至少一个程序。例如,应用程序510可以包括应用1至N,还包括执行本文所述方法的视频译码应用。In one implementation, the memory 504 in the apparatus 500 may be a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device may be used as memory 504 . Memory 504 may include code and data 506 accessed by processor 502 via bus 512 . The memory 504 may also include an operating system 508 and application programs 510 including at least one program that allows the processor 502 to perform the methods described herein. For example, applications 510 may include applications 1 through N, and also include video coding applications that perform the methods described herein.
装置500还可以包括一个或多个输出设备,例如显示器518。在一个示例中,显示器518可以是将显示器与可用于感测触摸输入的触敏元件组合的触敏显示器。显示器518可以通过总线512耦合到处理器502。 Apparatus 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as display 518 . In one example, display 518 may be a touch-sensitive display that combines a display with touch-sensitive elements that may be used to sense touch input. Display 518 may be coupled to processor 502 through bus 512 .
虽然装置500中的总线512在本文中描述为单个总线,但是总线512可以包括多个总线。此外,辅助储存器可以直接耦合到装置500的其它组件或通过网络访问,并且可以包括存储卡等单个集成单元或多个存储卡等多个单元。因此,装置500可以具有各种各样的配置。Although bus 512 in device 500 is described herein as a single bus, bus 512 may include multiple buses. In addition, secondary storage may be directly coupled to other components of the device 500 or accessed through a network, and may include a single integrated unit, such as a memory card, or multiple units, such as multiple memory cards. Accordingly, the apparatus 500 may have various configurations.
由于本申请实施例涉及神经网络的应用,为了便于理解,下面先对本申请实施例所使用到的一些名词或术语进行解释说明,该名词或术语也作为发明内容的一部分。Since the embodiments of the present application involve the application of neural networks, for ease of understanding, some nouns or terms used in the embodiments of the present application are explained below, and the nouns or terms are also part of the content of the invention.
(1)神经网络(1) Neural network
神经网络(neural network,NN)是机器学习模型,神经网络可以是由神经单元组成的,神经单元可以是指以xs和截距1为输入的运算单元,该运算单元的输出可以为:A neural network (NN) is a machine learning model. A neural network can be composed of neural units. A neural unit can refer to an operation unit that takes xs and intercept 1 as input. The output of the operation unit can be:
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000001
其中,s=1、2、……n,n为大于1的自然数,Ws为xs的权重,b为神经单元的偏置。f为神经单元的激活函数(activation functions),用于将非线性特性引入神经网络中,来将神经单元中的输入信号转换为输出信号。该激活函数的输出信号可以作为下一层卷积层的输入。激活函数可以是sigmoid函数。神经网络是将许多个上述单一的神经单元联结在一起形成的网络,即一个神经单元的输出可以是另一个神经单元的输入。每个神经单元的输入可以与前一层的局部接受域相连,来提取局部接受域的特征,局部接受域可以是由若干个神经单元组成的区域。Among them, s=1, 2,...n, n is a natural number greater than 1, Ws is the weight of xs, and b is the bias of the neural unit. f is the activation function of the neural unit, which is used to introduce nonlinear characteristics into the neural network to convert the input signal in the neural unit into an output signal. The output signal of this activation function can be used as the input of the next convolutional layer. The activation function can be a sigmoid function. A neural network is a network formed by connecting many of the above single neural units together, that is, the output of one neural unit can be the input of another neural unit. The input of each neural unit can be connected with the local receptive field of the previous layer to extract the features of the local receptive field, and the local receptive field can be an area composed of several neural units.
(2)深度神经网络(2) Deep neural network
深度神经网络(deep neural network,DNN),也称多层神经网络,可以理解为具有很多层隐含层的神经网络,这里的“很多”并没有特别的度量标准。从DNN按不同层的位置划分,DNN内部的神经网络可以分为三类:输入层,隐含层,输出层。一般来说第一层是输入层,最后一层是输出层,中间的层数都是隐含层。层与层之间是全连接的,也就是说,第i层的任意一个神经元一定与第i+1层的任意一个神经元相连。虽然DNN看起来很复杂,但是就每一层的工作来说,其实并不复杂,简单来说就是如下线性关系表达式:
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000003
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000004
是输入向量,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000005
是输出向量,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000006
是偏移向量,W是权重矩阵(也称系数),α()是激活函数。每一层仅仅是对输入向量
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000007
经过如此简单的操作得到输出向量
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000008
由于DNN层数多,则系数W和偏移向量
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000009
的数量也就很多了。这些参数在DNN中的定义如下所述:以系数W为例:假设在一个三层的DNN中,第二层的第4个神经元到第三层的第2个神经元的线性系数定义为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000010
上标3代表系数W所在的层数,而下标对应的是输出的第三层索引2和输入的第二层索引4。总结就是:第L-1层的第k个神经元到第L层的第j个神经元的系数定义为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000011
需要注意的是,输入层是没有W参数的。在深度神经网络中,更多的隐含层让网络更能够刻画现实世界中的复杂情形。理论上而言,参数越多的模型复杂度越高,“容量”也就越大,也就意味着它能完成更复杂的学习任务。训练深度神经网络的也就是学习权重矩阵的过程,其最终目的是得到训练好的深度神经网络的所有层的权重矩阵(由很多层的向量W形成的权重矩阵)。
Deep neural network (deep neural network, DNN), also known as multi-layer neural network, can be understood as a neural network with many hidden layers, and there is no special metric for "many" here. From the division of DNN according to the position of different layers, the neural network inside DNN can be divided into three categories: input layer, hidden layer, and output layer. Generally speaking, the first layer is the input layer, the last layer is the output layer, and the middle layers are all hidden layers. The layers are fully connected, that is, any neuron in the i-th layer must be connected to any neuron in the i+1-th layer. Although DNN looks complicated, in terms of the work of each layer, it is not complicated. In short, it is the following linear relationship expression:
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000003
in,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000004
is the input vector,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000005
is the output vector,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000006
is the offset vector, W is the weight matrix (also called coefficients), and α() is the activation function. Each layer is just an input vector
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000007
After such a simple operation to get the output vector
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000008
Due to the large number of DNN layers, the coefficient W and offset vector
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000009
The number is also much larger. These parameters are defined in the DNN as follows: Take the coefficient W as an example: Suppose that in a three-layer DNN, the linear coefficient from the 4th neuron in the second layer to the 2nd neuron in the third layer is defined as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000010
The superscript 3 represents the number of layers where the coefficient W is located, and the subscript corresponds to the output third layer index 2 and the input second layer index 4. The summary is: the coefficient from the kth neuron in the L-1 layer to the jth neuron in the Lth layer is defined as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000011
It should be noted that the input layer does not have a W parameter. In a deep neural network, more hidden layers allow the network to better capture the complexities of the real world. In theory, a model with more parameters is more complex and has a larger "capacity", which means that it can complete more complex learning tasks. Training the deep neural network is the process of learning the weight matrix, and its ultimate goal is to obtain the weight matrix of all layers of the trained deep neural network (the weight matrix formed by the vectors W of many layers).
(3)卷积神经网络(3) Convolutional Neural Network
卷积神经网络(convolutional neuron network,CNN)是一种带有卷积结构的深度神经网络,是一种深度学习(deep learning)架构,深度学习架构是指通过机器学习的算法,在不同的抽象层级上进行多个层次的学习。作为一种深度学习架构,CNN是一种前馈(feed-forward)人工神经网络,该前馈人工神经网络中的各个神经元可以对输入其中的图像作出响应。卷积神经网络包含了一个由卷积层和池化层构成的特征抽取器。该特征抽取器可以看作是滤波器,卷积过程可以看作是使用一个可训练的滤波器与一个输入的图像或者卷积特征平面(feature map)做卷积。Convolutional neural network (CNN) is a deep neural network with a convolutional structure and a deep learning architecture. Learning at multiple levels. As a deep learning architecture, CNN is a feed-forward artificial neural network in which individual neurons can respond to images fed into it. A convolutional neural network consists of a feature extractor consisting of convolutional and pooling layers. The feature extractor can be viewed as a filter, and the convolution process can be viewed as convolution with an input image or a convolutional feature map using a trainable filter.
卷积层是指卷积神经网络中对输入信号进行卷积处理的神经元层。卷积层可以包括很多个卷积算子,卷积算子也称为核,其在图像处理中的作用相当于一个从输入图像矩阵中提取特定信息的过滤器,卷积算子本质上可以是一个权重矩阵,这个权重矩阵通常被预先 定义,在对图像进行卷积操作的过程中,权重矩阵通常在输入图像上沿着水平方向一个像素接着一个像素(或两个像素接着两个像素……这取决于步长stride的取值)的进行处理,从而完成从图像中提取特定特征的工作。该权重矩阵的大小应该与图像的大小相关,需要注意的是,权重矩阵的纵深维度(depth dimension)和输入图像的纵深维度是相同的,在进行卷积运算的过程中,权重矩阵会延伸到输入图像的整个深度。因此,和一个单一的权重矩阵进行卷积会产生一个单一纵深维度的卷积化输出,但是大多数情况下不使用单一权重矩阵,而是应用多个尺寸(行×列)相同的权重矩阵,即多个同型矩阵。每个权重矩阵的输出被堆叠起来形成卷积图像的纵深维度,这里的维度可以理解为由上面所述的“多个”来决定。不同的权重矩阵可以用来提取图像中不同的特征,例如一个权重矩阵用来提取图像边缘信息,另一个权重矩阵用来提取图像的特定颜色,又一个权重矩阵用来对图像中不需要的噪点进行模糊化等。该多个权重矩阵尺寸(行×列)相同,经过该多个尺寸相同的权重矩阵提取后的特征图的尺寸也相同,再将提取到的多个尺寸相同的特征图合并形成卷积运算的输出。这些权重矩阵中的权重值在实际应用中需要经过大量的训练得到,通过训练得到的权重值形成的各个权重矩阵可以用来从输入图像中提取信息,从而使得卷积神经网络进行正确的预测。当卷积神经网络有多个卷积层的时候,初始的卷积层往往提取较多的一般特征,该一般特征也可以称之为低级别的特征;随着卷积神经网络深度的加深,越往后的卷积层提取到的特征越来越复杂,比如高级别的语义之类的特征,语义越高的特征越适用于待解决的问题。The convolutional layer refers to the neuron layer in the convolutional neural network that convolves the input signal. The convolution layer can include many convolution operators. The convolution operator is also called the kernel. Its role in image processing is equivalent to a filter that extracts specific information from the input image matrix. The convolution operator can essentially is a weight matrix, which is usually pre-defined, during the convolution operation on the image, the weight matrix is usually one pixel by one pixel (or two pixels by two pixels) along the horizontal direction on the input image... ...it depends on the value of stride) to process, so as to complete the work of extracting specific features from the image. The size of the weight matrix should be related to the size of the image. It should be noted that the depth dimension of the weight matrix is the same as the depth dimension of the input image. During the convolution operation, the weight matrix will be extended to Enter the entire depth of the image. Therefore, convolution with a single weight matrix will result in a single depth dimension of the convolutional output, but in most cases a single weight matrix is not used, but multiple weight matrices of the same size (row × column) are applied, That is, multiple isotype matrices. The output of each weight matrix is stacked to form the depth dimension of the convolutional image, where the dimension can be understood as determined by the "multiple" described above. Different weight matrices can be used to extract different features in the image. For example, one weight matrix is used to extract image edge information, another weight matrix is used to extract specific colors of the image, and another weight matrix is used to extract unwanted noise in the image. Blur, etc. The multiple weight matrices have the same size (row×column), and the size of the feature maps extracted from the multiple weight matrices with the same size is also the same, and then the multiple extracted feature maps with the same size are combined to form a convolution operation. output. The weight values in these weight matrices need to be obtained through a lot of training in practical applications, and each weight matrix formed by the weight values obtained by training can be used to extract information from the input image, so that the convolutional neural network can make correct predictions. When the convolutional neural network has multiple convolutional layers, the initial convolutional layer often extracts more general features, which can also be called low-level features; as the depth of the convolutional neural network deepens, The features extracted by the later convolutional layers are more and more complex, such as features such as high-level semantics, and the features with higher semantics are more suitable for the problem to be solved.
由于常常需要减少训练参数的数量,因此卷积层之后常常需要周期性的引入池化层,可以是一层卷积层后面跟一层池化层,也可以是多层卷积层后面接一层或多层池化层。在图像处理过程中,池化层的唯一目的就是减少图像的空间大小。池化层可以包括平均池化算子和/或最大池化算子,以用于对输入图像进行采样得到较小尺寸的图像。平均池化算子可以在特定范围内对图像中的像素值进行计算产生平均值作为平均池化的结果。最大池化算子可以在特定范围内取该范围内值最大的像素作为最大池化的结果。另外,就像卷积层中用权重矩阵的大小应该与图像尺寸相关一样,池化层中的运算符也应该与图像的大小相关。通过池化层处理后输出的图像尺寸可以小于输入池化层的图像的尺寸,池化层输出的图像中每个像素点表示输入池化层的图像的对应子区域的平均值或最大值。Since it is often necessary to reduce the number of training parameters, it is often necessary to periodically introduce a pooling layer after the convolutional layer, which can be a convolutional layer followed by a pooling layer, or a multi-layer convolutional layer followed by a layer or multiple pooling layers. During image processing, the only purpose of pooling layers is to reduce the spatial size of the image. The pooling layer may include an average pooling operator and/or a max pooling operator for sampling the input image to obtain a smaller size image. The average pooling operator can calculate the pixel values in the image within a certain range to produce an average value as the result of average pooling. The max pooling operator can take the pixel with the largest value within a specific range as the result of max pooling. Also, just as the size of the weight matrix used in the convolutional layer should be related to the size of the image, the operators in the pooling layer should also be related to the size of the image. The size of the output image after processing by the pooling layer can be smaller than the size of the image input to the pooling layer, and each pixel in the image output by the pooling layer represents the average or maximum value of the corresponding sub-region of the image input to the pooling layer.
在经过卷积层/池化层的处理后,卷积神经网络还不足以输出所需要的输出信息。因为如前所述,卷积层/池化层只会提取特征,并减少输入图像带来的参数。然而为了生成最终的输出信息(所需要的类信息或其他相关信息),卷积神经网络需要利用神经网络层来生成一个或者一组所需要的类的数量的输出。因此,在神经网络层中可以包括多层隐含层,该多层隐含层中所包含的参数可以根据具体的任务类型的相关训练数据进行预先训练得到,例如该任务类型可以包括图像识别,图像分类,图像超分辨率重建等等。After processing by the convolutional layer/pooling layer, the convolutional neural network is not enough to output the required output information. Because as mentioned before, convolutional/pooling layers will only extract features and reduce the parameters brought by the input image. However, in order to generate the final output information (required class information or other relevant information), the convolutional neural network needs to utilize neural network layers to generate one or a set of outputs of the required number of classes. Therefore, the neural network layer may include multiple hidden layers, and the parameters contained in the multiple hidden layers may be obtained by pre-training according to the relevant training data of a specific task type. For example, the task type may include image recognition, Image classification, image super-resolution reconstruction, and more.
可选的,在神经网络层中的多层隐含层之后,还包括整个卷积神经网络的输出层,该输出层具有类似分类交叉熵的损失函数,具体用于计算预测误差,一旦整个卷积神经网络的前向传播完成,反向传播就会开始更新前面提到的各层的权重值以及偏差,以减少卷积神经网络的损失,及卷积神经网络通过输出层输出的结果和理想结果之间的误差。Optionally, after the multi-layer hidden layers in the neural network layer, it also includes the output layer of the entire convolutional neural network, which has a loss function similar to categorical cross-entropy, specifically for calculating the prediction error, once the entire volume The forward propagation of the convolutional neural network is completed, and the backpropagation will start to update the weight values and biases of the aforementioned layers to reduce the loss of the convolutional neural network, and the result and ideal output of the convolutional neural network through the output layer. error between results.
(4)循环神经网络(4) Recurrent Neural Network
循环神经网络(recurrent neural networks,RNN)是用来处理序列数据的。在传统的神 经网络模型中,是从输入层到隐含层再到输出层,层与层之间是全连接的,而对于每一层层内之间的各个节点是无连接的。这种普通的神经网络虽然解决了很多难题,但是却仍然对很多问题却无能无力。例如,你要预测句子的下一个单词是什么,一般需要用到前面的单词,因为一个句子中前后单词并不是独立的。RNN之所以称为循环神经网路,即一个序列当前的输出与前面的输出也有关。具体的表现形式为网络会对前面的信息进行记忆并应用于当前输出的计算中,即隐含层本层之间的节点不再无连接而是有连接的,并且隐含层的输入不仅包括输入层的输出还包括上一时刻隐含层的输出。理论上,RNN能够对任何长度的序列数据进行处理。对于RNN的训练和对传统的CNN或DNN的训练一样。同样使用误差反向传播算法,不过有一点区别:即,如果将RNN进行网络展开,那么其中的参数,如W,是共享的;而如上举例上述的传统神经网络却不是这样。并且在使用梯度下降算法中,每一步的输出不仅依赖当前步的网络,还依赖前面若干步网络的状态。该学习算法称为基于时间的反向传播算法(Back propagation Through Time,BPTT)。Recurrent neural networks (RNNs) are used to process sequence data. In the traditional neural network model, from the input layer to the hidden layer to the output layer, the layers are fully connected, and the nodes in each layer are unconnected. Although this ordinary neural network solves many problems, it is still powerless for many problems. For example, if you want to predict the next word of a sentence, you generally need to use the previous words, because the front and rear words in a sentence are not independent. The reason why RNN is called a recurrent neural network is that the current output of a sequence is also related to the previous output. The specific manifestation is that the network will memorize the previous information and apply it to the calculation of the current output, that is, the nodes between the hidden layer and this layer are no longer unconnected but connected, and the input of the hidden layer not only includes The output of the input layer also includes the output of the hidden layer at the previous moment. In theory, RNN can process sequence data of any length. The training of RNN is the same as the training of traditional CNN or DNN. The error back-propagation algorithm is also used, but there is one difference: that is, if the RNN is expanded, the parameters, such as W, are shared; while the traditional neural network mentioned above is not the case. And in the gradient descent algorithm, the output of each step depends not only on the network of the current step, but also on the state of the network in the previous steps. This learning algorithm is called Back propagation Through Time (BPTT).
既然已经有了卷积神经网络,为什么还要循环神经网络?原因很简单,在卷积神经网络中,有一个前提假设是:元素之间是相互独立的,输入与输出也是独立的,比如猫和狗。但现实世界中,很多元素都是相互连接的,比如股票随时间的变化,再比如一个人说了:我喜欢旅游,其中最喜欢的地方是云南,以后有机会一定要去。这里填空,人类应该都知道是填“云南”。因为人类会根据上下文的内容进行推断,但如何让机器做到这一步?RNN就应运而生了。RNN旨在让机器像人一样拥有记忆的能力。因此,RNN的输出就需要依赖当前的输入信息和历史的记忆信息。Why use a recurrent neural network when you already have a convolutional neural network? The reason is very simple. In the convolutional neural network, there is a premise that the elements are independent of each other, and the input and output are also independent, such as cats and dogs. But in the real world, many elements are interconnected, such as the change of stocks over time, and another example of a person who said: I like to travel, and my favorite place is Yunnan. I must go there in the future. Fill in the blanks here. Humans should all know that it is "Yunnan". Because humans make inferences based on the content of the context, but how do you get machines to do this? RNN came into being. RNNs are designed to give machines the ability to memorize like humans do. Therefore, the output of RNN needs to rely on current input information and historical memory information.
(5)损失函数(5) Loss function
在训练深度神经网络的过程中,因为希望深度神经网络的输出尽可能的接近真正想要预测的值,所以可以通过比较当前网络的预测值和真正想要的目标值,再根据两者之间的差异情况来更新每一层神经网络的权重向量(当然,在第一次更新之前通常会有初始化的过程,即为深度神经网络中的各层预先配置参数),比如,如果网络的预测值高了,就调整权重向量让它预测低一些,不断的调整,直到深度神经网络能够预测出真正想要的目标值或与真正想要的目标值非常接近的值。因此,就需要预先定义“如何比较预测值和目标值之间的差异”,这便是损失函数(loss function)或目标函数(objective function),它们是用于衡量预测值和目标值的差异的重要方程。其中,以损失函数举例,损失函数的输出值(loss)越高表示差异越大,那么深度神经网络的训练就变成了尽可能缩小这个loss的过程。In the process of training a deep neural network, because it is hoped that the output of the deep neural network is as close as possible to the value you really want to predict, you can compare the predicted value of the current network with the target value you really want, and then based on the difference between the two to update the weight vector of each layer of neural network (of course, there is usually an initialization process before the first update, that is, to pre-configure parameters for each layer in the deep neural network), for example, if the predicted value of the network If it is high, adjust the weight vector to make its prediction lower, and keep adjusting until the deep neural network can predict the real desired target value or a value that is very close to the real desired target value. Therefore, it is necessary to pre-define "how to compare the difference between the predicted value and the target value", which is the loss function (loss function) or objective function (objective function), which are used to measure the difference between the predicted value and the target value. important equation. Among them, taking the loss function as an example, the higher the output value of the loss function (loss), the greater the difference, then the training of the deep neural network becomes the process of reducing the loss as much as possible.
(6)反向传播算法(6) Back propagation algorithm
卷积神经网络可以采用误差反向传播(back propagation,BP)算法在训练过程中修正初始的超分辨率模型中参数的大小,使得超分辨率模型的重建误差损失越来越小。具体地,前向传递输入信号直至输出会产生误差损失,通过反向传播误差损失信息来更新初始的超分辨率模型中参数,从而使误差损失收敛。反向传播算法是以误差损失为主导的反向传播运动,旨在得到最优的超分辨率模型的参数,例如权重矩阵。The convolutional neural network can use the error back propagation (BP) algorithm to correct the size of the parameters in the initial super-resolution model during the training process, so that the reconstruction error loss of the super-resolution model becomes smaller and smaller. Specifically, forwarding the input signal until the output will generate an error loss, and updating the parameters in the initial super-resolution model by back-propagating the error loss information, so that the error loss converges. The back-propagation algorithm is a back-propagation motion dominated by the error loss, aiming to obtain the parameters of the optimal super-resolution model, such as the weight matrix.
(7)生成式对抗网络(7) Generative Adversarial Networks
生成式对抗网络(generative adversarial networks,GAN)是一种深度学习模型。该模型中至少包括两个模块:一个模块是生成模型(Generative Model),另一个模块是判别模 型(Discriminative Model),通过这两个模块互相博弈学习,从而产生更好的输出。生成模型和判别模型都可以是神经网络,具体可以是深度神经网络,或者卷积神经网络。GAN的基本原理如下:以生成图片的GAN为例,假设有两个网络,G(Generator)和D(Discriminator),其中G是一个生成图片的网络,它接收一个随机的噪声z,通过这个噪声生成图片,记做G(z);D是一个判别网络,用于判别一张图片是不是“真实的”。它的输入参数是x,x代表一张图片,输出D(x)代表x为真实图片的概率,如果为1,就代表100%是真实的图片,如果为0,就代表不可能是真实的图片。在对该生成式对抗网络进行训练的过程中,生成网络G的目标就是尽可能生成真实的图片去欺骗判别网络D,而判别网络D的目标就是尽量把G生成的图片和真实的图片区分开来。这样,G和D就构成了一个动态的“博弈”过程,也即“生成式对抗网络”中的“对抗”。最后博弈的结果,在理想的状态下,G可以生成足以“以假乱真”的图片G(z),而D难以判定G生成的图片究竟是不是真实的,即D(G(z))=0.5。这样就得到了一个优异的生成模型G,它可以用来生成图片。Generative adversarial networks (GANs) are deep learning models. The model includes at least two modules: one module is the Generative Model, and the other is the Discriminative Model, through which the two modules learn from each other through game play to produce better output. Both the generative model and the discriminative model can be neural networks, specifically, deep neural networks or convolutional neural networks. The basic principle of GAN is as follows: Take the GAN that generates pictures as an example, suppose there are two networks, G (Generator) and D (Discriminator), where G is a network that generates pictures, it receives a random noise z, through this noise Generate a picture, denoted as G(z); D is a discriminant network used to determine whether a picture is "real". Its input parameter is x, x represents a picture, and the output D(x) represents the probability that x is a real picture. If it is 1, it means 100% of the real picture, if it is 0, it means it is impossible to be real picture. In the process of training the generative adversarial network, the goal of generating network G is to generate real pictures as much as possible to deceive the discriminant network D, and the goal of discriminant network D is to try to distinguish the pictures generated by G from the real pictures. Come. In this way, G and D constitute a dynamic "game" process, that is, the "confrontation" in the "generative confrontation network". As a result of the final game, in an ideal state, G can generate a picture G(z) that is "real", but it is difficult for D to determine whether the picture generated by G is real, that is, D(G(z))=0.5. This results in an excellent generative model G, which can be used to generate images.
下面将结合图6a-图6e详细地描述用于帧间预测的目标模型(亦称为神经网络)。图6a-图6e为本申请实施例的用于帧间预测的神经网络的几个示例性架构。The target model (also referred to as a neural network) for inter prediction will be described in detail below with reference to Figs. 6a-6e. 6a-6e are several exemplary architectures of a neural network for inter-frame prediction according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图6a所示,该神经网络按照处理的先后顺序,依次包括:3×3卷积层(3×3Conv)、激活层(Relu)、块处理层(Res-Block)、…、块处理层、3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层。输入神经网络的原始矩阵经过上述层处理后得到的矩阵,再与原始矩阵相加得到最终的输出矩阵。As shown in Figure 6a, the neural network includes: 3×3 convolutional layer (3×3Conv), activation layer (Relu), block processing layer (Res-Block), ..., block processing layer according to the order of processing , 3×3 convolutional layers, activation layers and 3×3 convolutional layers. The original matrix input to the neural network is processed by the above-mentioned layers to obtain the matrix, and then added to the original matrix to obtain the final output matrix.
如图6b所示,该神经网络按照处理的先后顺序,依次包括:两路3×3卷积层和激活层,一路块处理层、…、块处理层、3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层。第一矩阵经过一路3×3卷积层和激活层,第二矩阵经过另一路3×3卷积层和激活层,处理后的两个矩阵合并(contact)后再经过块处理层、…、块处理层、3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层处理后得到的矩阵,再与第一矩阵相加得到最终的输出矩阵。As shown in Figure 6b, the neural network includes, in order of processing: two 3×3 convolutional layers and activation layers, one block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3×3 convolutional layer, and activation layer and 3×3 convolutional layers. The first matrix passes through a 3×3 convolution layer and an activation layer, the second matrix passes through another 3×3 convolution layer and an activation layer, and the processed two matrices are merged (contact) and then passed through the block processing layer, …, The matrix obtained after the block processing layer, the 3×3 convolutional layer, the activation layer and the 3×3 convolutional layer is added to the first matrix to obtain the final output matrix.
如图6c所示,该神经网络按照处理的先后顺序,依次包括:两路3×3卷积层和激活层,一路块处理层、…、块处理层、3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层。第一矩阵和第二矩阵在输入神经网络之前,先做相乘,然后将第一矩阵经过一路3×3卷积层和激活层,将相乘后的矩阵经过另一路3×3卷积层和激活层,处理后的两个矩阵相加后再经过块处理层、…、块处理层、3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层处理后得到的矩阵,再与第一矩阵相加得到最终的输出矩阵。As shown in Figure 6c, the neural network includes, in order of processing: two 3×3 convolutional layers and activation layers, one block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3×3 convolutional layer, and activation layer and 3×3 convolutional layers. The first matrix and the second matrix are multiplied before they are input to the neural network, and then the first matrix is passed through a 3×3 convolution layer and an activation layer, and the multiplied matrix is passed through another 3×3 convolution layer. And the activation layer, the two processed matrices are added and then processed by the block processing layer, ..., block processing layer, 3 × 3 convolution layer, activation layer and 3 × 3 convolution layer. A matrix is added to get the final output matrix.
如图6d所示,上述块处理层按照处理的先后顺序,依次包括:3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层,将输入矩阵经这三层处理后,再将处理后得到的矩阵和初始输入矩阵相加得到输出矩阵。如图6c所示,上述块处理层按照处理的先后顺序,依次包括:3×3卷积层、激活层、3×3卷积层和激活层,将输入矩阵经3×3卷积层、激活层和3×3卷积层处理后,再将处理后得到的矩阵和初始输入矩阵相加后再经过一个激活层得到输出矩阵。As shown in Figure 6d, the above-mentioned block processing layers include: 3×3 convolutional layers, activation layers and 3×3 convolutional layers in order of processing. After the input matrix is processed by these three layers, the processed The resulting matrix is added to the initial input matrix to obtain the output matrix. As shown in Figure 6c, the above-mentioned block processing layers include, in order of processing, a 3×3 convolution layer, an activation layer, a 3×3 convolution layer, and an activation layer. The input matrix is passed through the 3×3 convolution layer, After the activation layer and the 3×3 convolution layer are processed, the matrix obtained after processing is added to the initial input matrix, and then the output matrix is obtained through an activation layer.
需要说明的是,如图6a-图6e仅示出了本申请实施例的用于帧间预测的神经网络的几种示例性的架构,其并不构成对神经网络架构的限定,该神经网络中包括的层数、层结构、相加、相乘或合并等处理,以及输入和/或输出的矩阵的数量、尺寸等均可以根据实际情况而定,本申请对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that, Figures 6a-6e only show several exemplary architectures of the neural network used for inter-frame prediction in the embodiments of the present application, which do not constitute a limitation on the architecture of the neural network. The number of layers, layer structure, addition, multiplication, or merging, etc. included in the process, as well as the number and size of input and/or output matrices, can be determined according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application.
图8为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程800的流程图。过程800可由视频编码器20或视频解码器30执行,具体的,可以由视频编码器20或视频解码器30的帧间预测单元244、344来执行。过程800描述为一系列的步骤或操作,应当理解的是,过程800可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生,不限于图8所示的执行顺序。假设具有多个图像帧的视频数据流正在使用视频编码器或者视频解码器,执行包括如下步骤的过程800来对图像或图像块进行帧间预测。过程800可以包括:FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a process 800 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application. Process 800 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 . Process 800 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 800 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 8 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 800 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block. Process 800 may include:
步骤801、获取当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量。Step 801: Acquire respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block.
当前块的周边区域包括当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域,其中空间邻域的图像块可以包括位于当前块左侧的左方候选图像块和位于当前块上方的上方候选图像块。示例性的,如图7所示,左方候选图像块的集合包括{A0,A1},上方候选图像块的集合包括{B0,B1,B2},时域相邻的候选图像块的集合包括{C,T}。已重建图像块可以是指编码端已经编码并获取其重建的编码图像块或者解码端已解码重构的解码图像块。已重建图像块也可以是指将编码图像块或解码图像块等大小划分而来的预设大小的基本单元图像块。例如,编码图像块或解码图像块的尺寸可以是16×16、64×64或32×16,基本单元图像块的尺寸可以是4×4或8×8。The surrounding area of the current block includes spatial and/or temporal neighborhoods of the current block, wherein the image blocks in the spatial neighborhood may include left candidate image blocks located to the left of the current block and upper candidate image blocks located above the current block. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7 , the set of candidate image blocks on the left includes {A0, A1}, the set of candidate image blocks on the upper side includes {B0, B1, B2}, and the set of temporally adjacent candidate image blocks includes {C, T}. The reconstructed image block may refer to an encoded image block that has been encoded by an encoder and obtained for reconstruction, or a decoded image block that has been decoded and reconstructed by a decoder. The reconstructed image block may also refer to a basic unit image block of a preset size obtained by dividing an encoded image block or a decoded image block into sizes. For example, the size of the encoded image block or the decoded image block may be 16×16, 64×64 or 32×16, and the size of the basic unit image block may be 4×4 or 8×8.
以下以某个已重建图像块为例进行说明,该已重建图像块可以是周边区域中的多个已重建图像块中的任意一个,其他已重建图像块均可参照该方法。The following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example, the reconstructed image block may be any one of a plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area, and other reconstructed image blocks may refer to this method.
已重建图像块的运动矢量可以包括:(1)已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量,该多个后验运动矢量是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的;或者,(2)已重建图像块的最优运动矢量,该最优运动矢量是上述多个后验运动矢量中概率值最大或预测误差值最小的后验运动矢量。The motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks may include: (1) multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image blocks, the multiple posterior motion vectors are corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks or, (2) the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block, where the optimal motion vector is the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the above-mentioned multiple posterior motion vectors.
多个后验候选运动矢量是根据已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的,针对已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个先验候选运动矢量,可以让其在一个预设的搜索窗口内进行偏移,生成多个偏移候选运动矢量。可见,已重建图像块的一个先验候选运动矢量可以得到多个偏移候选运动矢量。已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量,均按上述操作,得到的所有偏移候选运动矢量即为已重建图想块的多个后验候选运动矢量。例如,图10为本申请实施例的搜索窗口的示例性的示意图,如图10所示,假设已重建图像块的某一个先验候选运动矢量为(0,0),将该先验候选运动矢量在一个3×3的搜索窗口内进行偏移,可以得到9个偏移候选运动矢量:(-1,-1)、(-1,0)、(-1,1)、(0,-1)、(0,0)、(0,1)、(1,-1)、(1,0)、(1,1)。该9个偏移候选运动矢量即为已重建图像块的多个后验候选运动矢量。The multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors are obtained from multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. For any a priori candidate motion vector among the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, it can be Offset is performed within a preset search window to generate multiple offset candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that a priori candidate motion vector of the reconstructed image block can obtain multiple offset candidate motion vectors. The multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block are operated as above, and all the obtained offset candidate motion vectors are the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. For example, FIG. 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a search window according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10 , assuming that a certain prior candidate motion vector of the reconstructed image block is (0, 0), the prior candidate motion vector is (0, 0). The vector is offset within a 3×3 search window, and 9 offset candidate motion vectors can be obtained: (-1,-1), (-1,0), (-1,1), (0,- 1), (0,0), (0,1), (1,-1), (1,0), (1,1). The nine offset candidate motion vectors are multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors of the reconstructed image block.
已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量可以是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量;也可以是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量中的部分运动矢量,例如上述多个后验候选运动矢量中选出的多个指定的运动矢量。The multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors; may also refer to the partial motion vectors in the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors.
多个后验运动矢量的概率值或者预测误差值可以参见下文描述。The probability values or prediction error values of a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors may be described below.
在一种可能的实现方式中,除了获取已重建图像块的运动矢量外,还可以获取已重建图像块的相关信息,该相关信息及其获取方法如下所述:In a possible implementation manner, in addition to acquiring the motion vector of the reconstructed image block, related information of the reconstructed image block can also be acquired, and the related information and its acquisition method are as follows:
一、已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,多个预测误差值也是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的。1. Multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and multiple prediction error values are also determined according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors .
根据多个后验候选运动矢量分别对已重建图像块执行运动补偿,可以得到多个预测值, 该多个预测值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应。Motion compensation is respectively performed on the reconstructed image block according to the multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, and multiple predicted values can be obtained, and the multiple predicted values correspond to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
将多个预测值分别与已重建图像块的重建值进行比较,得到多个预测误差值,该多个预测误差值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应。本申请可以采用绝对误差和(sum of absolute difference,SAD)或平方误差和(sum of squared difference,SSE)等方法获取对应于某一个后验候选运动矢量的预测误差值。The multiple prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain multiple prediction error values, and the multiple prediction error values correspond to multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors. In the present application, methods such as sum of absolute difference (SAD) or sum of squared difference (SSE) can be used to obtain the prediction error value corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
若已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量,则已重建图像块的与上述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值是指对应于上述多个后验候选运动矢量的多个预测误差值;若已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量是指上述多个后验候选运动矢量中的部分运动矢量,则已重建图像块的与上述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值是指从对应于上述多个后验候选运动矢量的多个预测误差值中选出的与该部分运动矢量对应的预测误差值。If the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors refer to the multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block. Multiple prediction error values of a posteriori candidate motion vector; if the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block refer to some motion vectors in the above multiple posterior candidate motion vectors, the reconstructed image block is the same as the above multiple motion vectors. The multiple prediction error values corresponding to the a posteriori motion vectors refer to the prediction error values corresponding to the partial motion vector selected from the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
二、已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,多个概率值也是根据已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的。2. Multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and multiple probability values are also determined according to the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值可以有以下两种获取方法:The multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
一种是根据第一种方法中得到的已重建图像块的多个预测误差值,得到已重建图像块的多个概率值。例如,可以使用归一化指数函数、线性归一化方法等方法对已重建图像块的多个预测误差值进行归一化处理,得到多个预测误差值的归一化值,该多个预测误差值的归一化值即为已重建图像块的多个概率值,基于已重建图像块的多个预测误差值与多个后验运动矢量的对应关系,已重建图像块的多个概率值也与已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量对应,该概率值可以表示与之对应的后验运动矢量成为该已重建图像块的最优运动矢量的概率。One is to obtain multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method. For example, a normalized exponential function, a linear normalization method, etc. can be used to normalize the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks to obtain the normalized values of the multiple prediction error values. The normalized value of the error value is the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block. Based on the correspondence between the multiple prediction error values of the reconstructed image block and the multiple posterior motion vectors, the multiple probability values of the reconstructed image block Also corresponding to a plurality of posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, the probability value can represent the probability that the posterior motion vector corresponding to it becomes the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
另一种是将已重建图像块的重建值和第一种方法中得到的已重建图像块的多个预测值,输入经训练的神经网络得到已重建图像块的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。该神经网络可以参照上述训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the multiple predicted values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first method into the trained neural network to obtain the reconstructed image block corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors multiple probability values. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
因此,在通过上述两种方法得到的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值或者概率值之后,已重建图像块的最优运动矢量可以有以下两种获取方法:Therefore, after obtaining multiple prediction error values or probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors through the above two methods, the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by the following two methods:
一种是将与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值中的最小预测误差值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。One is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the smallest prediction error value among the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
另一种是将与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值中的最大概率值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。The other is to use the posterior motion vector corresponding to the largest probability value among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors as the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block.
本申请中,可以直接读取存储器获取已重建图像块的上述运动矢量及其相关信息。在对已重建图像块进行编码或解码之后,可以立即采用上述方法获取已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息,然后将其存储下来,在对后续的图像块(当前块)进行帧间预测时可以直接从存储器的相应位置读取即可。这样可以提高当前块的帧间预测效率。In the present application, the above-mentioned motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by directly reading the memory. After the reconstructed image block is encoded or decoded, the above method can be used immediately to obtain the motion vector or motion vector of the reconstructed image block and its related information, and then store it for subsequent image blocks (current block). During inter-frame prediction, it can be directly read from the corresponding location in the memory. In this way, the inter prediction efficiency of the current block can be improved.
本申请中,也可以在对当前块进行帧间预测时,才计算已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息,即在对当前块进行帧间预测时,采用上述方法获取已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息。这样在确定需要用到哪个已重建图像块,才去计算,可以节省存储空间。In this application, the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can also be calculated only when the current block is inter-frame prediction, that is, when the current block is inter-frame prediction, the above method is used to obtain the reconstructed image block. The motion vector or motion vector of the image block and its related information. In this way, the calculation is performed after determining which reconstructed image block needs to be used, which can save storage space.
如果上述多个已重建图像块在编码或解码过程中均采用帧间预测,则可以采用上述方 法获取该多个已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息。如果多个已重建图像块中有部分图像块在编码或解码过程中没有采用帧间预测,也可以按照上述三种情况中描述的方法中的任意一种获取该部分图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息。If the above-mentioned multiple reconstructed image blocks all use inter-frame prediction in the encoding or decoding process, the above-mentioned method can be used to obtain the motion vectors or motion vectors and related information of the multiple reconstructed image blocks. If some image blocks in the plurality of reconstructed image blocks do not use inter-frame prediction in the process of encoding or decoding, the motion vector or motion of the partial image block can also be obtained according to any one of the methods described in the above three cases. vector and its related information.
如果已重建图像块包含多个基本单元图像块,则可以将该已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息作为其包含的所有基本单元图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息。进一步的,可以细化到将该已重建图像块的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息作为其包含的所有像素的运动矢量或者运动矢量及其相关信息。If the reconstructed image block contains multiple basic unit image blocks, the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be taken as the motion vector or motion vector and related information of all the basic unit image blocks contained in the reconstructed image block . Further, the motion vector or motion vector and related information of the reconstructed image block can be refined to be the motion vector or motion vector and related information of all the pixels contained therein.
步骤802、根据多个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Step 802: Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to the respective motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks.
当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量可以是指多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量去重后剩余的所有运动矢量,也可以是指多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量去重后剩余的所有运动矢量中的部分运动矢量。The multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block may refer to all the remaining motion vectors after deduplication of the multiple posterior motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks, or may refer to the multiple reconstructed image blocks. The partial motion vector among all the remaining motion vectors after the posterior motion vector is deduplicated.
可以将多个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量输入经训练的神经网络得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。该神经网络可以参照上述训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The respective motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,可以将多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,输入经训练的神经网络得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, multiple a posteriori motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors can be input into a trained neural network to obtain multiple priors of the current block. A candidate motion vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors.
可选的,可以将多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,输入经训练的神经网络得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into the trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidates for the current block. A motion vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors.
可选的,可以将多个已重建图像块的最优运动矢量,输入经训练的神经网络得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Optionally, the optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be input into a trained neural network to obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors. .
步骤803、根据与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,得到与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子。Step 803: Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
当多个概率值之和为1时,将与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的概率值作为与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的权重因子。即多个先验候选运动矢量各自的权重因子,是多个先验候选运动矢量各自的概率值;或者,当多个概率值之和不为1时,对多个概率值进行归一化处理;将与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的概率值的归一化值作为与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的权重因子。即多个先验候选运动矢量各自的权重因子,是多个先验候选运动矢量各自的概率值的归一化值。上述第一先验候选运动矢量是多个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个。可见,与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子之和为1。When the sum of the plurality of probability values is 1, the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector is used as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weight factors of multiple prior candidate motion vectors are the respective probability values of multiple prior candidate motion vectors; or, when the sum of multiple probability values is not 1, the multiple probability values are normalized ; take the normalized value of the probability value corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector. That is, the respective weighting factors of the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are normalized values of the respective probability values of the multiple prior candidate motion vectors. The above-mentioned first a priori candidate motion vector is any one of a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors. It can be seen that the sum of multiple weighting factors corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors is 1.
步骤804、根据多个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到多个预测值。Step 804: Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
根据帧间预测的原理,一个候选运动矢量可以在当前块的参考帧中找到一个参考块,根据该参考块对当前块进行帧间预测得到对应于该候选运动矢量的预测值,可见当前块的预测值对应于候选运动矢量。因此根据多个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿,可以得到当前块的多个预测值。According to the principle of inter-frame prediction, a candidate motion vector can find a reference block in the reference frame of the current block, and perform inter-frame prediction on the current block according to the reference block to obtain the predicted value corresponding to the candidate motion vector. The predicted values correspond to candidate motion vectors. Therefore, the motion compensation is respectively performed according to the multiple a priori candidate motion vectors, and multiple predicted values of the current block can be obtained.
步骤805、根据多个权重因子和多个预测值加权求和得到当前块的预测值。Step 805: Obtain the prediction value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values.
将对应于同一个先验候选运动矢量的权重因子和预测值相乘,再将对应于多个先验候 选运动矢量的多个乘积相加得到当前块的预测值。Multiply the weight factor corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector and the predicted value, and then add up multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain the predicted value of the current block.
本申请通过基于当前块的周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到当前块的多个权重因子和多个预测值,将对应于同一个先验候选运动矢量的权重因子和预测值相乘,再将对应于多个先验候选运动矢量的多个乘积相加得到当前块的预测值,这样得到的当前块的预测值是结合了多个先验候选运动矢量,从而能够更好的拟合现实世界中丰富多变的纹理,提升帧间预测的准确度,减小帧间预测的误差,改善帧间预测的整体率失真(rate-distortion optimization,RDO)效率。The present application obtains multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values of the current block based on the respective motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, and assigns the weighting factors and prediction values corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector The predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors, and the predicted value of the current block obtained in this way is a combination of multiple prior candidate motion vectors. It fits the rich and changeable textures in the real world well, improves the accuracy of inter-frame prediction, reduces the error of inter-frame prediction, and improves the overall rate-distortion optimization (RDO) efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在获取当前块的重建值后,可以立即获取当前块的运动矢量及其相关信息,该运动矢量及其相关信息可以参考步骤801,其获取方法包括:In a possible implementation manner, after obtaining the reconstruction value of the current block, the motion vector of the current block and its related information can be obtained immediately. For the motion vector and its related information, refer to step 801, and the obtaining method includes:
一、根据当前块的重建值和当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,当前块的多个后验运动矢量是根据当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的。1. Obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple prediction error values corresponding to multiple posterior motion vectors according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block. The multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the block are obtained from the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block.
二、根据当前块的重建值和当前块的多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值输入神经网络,得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,当前块的多个后验运动矢量是根据当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的,或者,根据当前块的多个预测误差值得到当前块的多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。2. Input the neural network according to the reconstructed value of the current block and the predicted values corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors of the current block to obtain multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block and multiple probabilities corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors value, the multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, or the multiple a posteriori motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block are obtained according to multiple prediction error values of the current block. a probability value.
三、将当前块的多个后验运动矢量中概率值最大或预测误差值最小的后验运动矢量确定为当前块的最优运动矢量。3. Determine the a posteriori motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block as the optimal motion vector of the current block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当前块的多个概率值包括M个概率值,该M个概率值均大于当前块的多个概率值中除M个概率值外的其他概率值。因此可以从当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量中选取与M个概率值对应的M个先验候选运动矢量,然后根据M个概率值获取M个权重因子,根据M个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到当前块的M个预测值,最后根据M个权重因子和M个预测值加权求和得到当前块的预测值。即从当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值中选取概率值最大的前M个概率值,并从当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量中选取与M个概率值对应的M个先验候选运动矢量,基于M个概率值和M个先验候选运动矢量进行权重因子和预测值的计算,进而得到当前块的预测值。而与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值中除前述M个概率值外的其余概率值,由于值较小可以忽略,这样可以减少计算量,提高帧间预测的效率。In a possible implementation manner, the multiple probability values of the current block include M probability values, and the M probability values are all greater than other probability values except the M probability values among the multiple probability values of the current block. Therefore, M a priori candidate motion vectors corresponding to M probability values can be selected from multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block, and then M weighting factors can be obtained according to the M probability values, and M a priori candidate motion vectors can be obtained according to the M probability values. Perform motion compensation respectively to obtain M predicted values of the current block, and finally obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of the M weighting factors and the M predicted values. That is, the top M probability values with the largest probability value are selected from the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and the M probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block are selected. For the corresponding M a priori candidate motion vectors, the weight factor and the prediction value are calculated based on the M probability values and the M a priori candidate motion vectors, and then the prediction value of the current block is obtained. Among the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors, the remaining probability values except the aforementioned M probability values can be ignored because the values are small, which can reduce the amount of calculation and improve the efficiency of inter-frame prediction.
下面采用几个具体的实施例,对图8所示方法实施例的技术方案进行详细说明。The technical solutions of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8 are described in detail below by using several specific embodiments.
实施例一Example 1
本实施例中,根据周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,确定当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。In this embodiment, multiple prior candidate motions of the current block are determined according to multiple a posteriori motion vectors of each of the multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors.
图9为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程900的流程图。过程900可由视频编码器20或视频解码器30执行,具体的,可以由视频编码器20或视频解码器30的帧间预测单元244、344来执行。过程900描述为一系列的步骤或操作,应当理解的是,过程900可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生,不限于图9所示的执行顺序。假设具有多个图像帧的视频数据流正在使用视频编码器或者视频解码器,执行包括如下步骤的过程900来对图像或图像块进行帧间预测。过程900可以包括:FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a process 900 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application. Process 900 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 . Process 900 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 900 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 9 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 900 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block. Process 900 may include:
步骤901、获取周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值。Step 901: Acquire a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
以下以某个已重建图像块为例进行说明,该已重建图像块可以是周边区域中的多个已重建图像块中的任意一个,其他已重建图像块均可参照该方法获取多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值。The following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example. The reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area. Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain multiple posteriors. A motion vector and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
已重建图像块的有N4个后验候选运动矢量,该N4个后验候选运动矢量是根据已重建图像块的多个先验候选运动矢量得到的,该获取方法可以参照上述步骤801的描述。根据该N4个后验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿,可以得到已重建图像块的N4个预测值,该N4个预测值和N4个后验候选运动矢量对应,即根据一个后验候选运动矢量对应的参考块对已重建图像块进行帧间预测,可以得到已重建图像块的一个预测值。将N4个预测值分别与已重建图像块的重建值进行比较,得到已重建图像块的N4个预测误差值,该N4个预测误差值和N4个后验候选运动矢量对应。本申请可以采用SAD或SSE等方法获取已重建图像块对应于某一个后验候选运动矢量的预测误差值。There are N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors in the reconstructed image block. The N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors are obtained according to a plurality of prior candidate motion vectors in the reconstructed image block. For the acquisition method, refer to the description of step 801 above. Motion compensation is performed respectively according to the N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors, and N4 predicted values of the reconstructed image block can be obtained. The N4 predicted values correspond to the N4 posterior candidate motion vectors, that is, according to one posterior candidate motion vector Perform inter-frame prediction on the reconstructed image block by using the reference block of , to obtain a predicted value of the reconstructed image block. The N4 prediction values are respectively compared with the reconstructed values of the reconstructed image block, and N4 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block are obtained, and the N4 prediction error values correspond to the N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors. The present application may adopt methods such as SAD or SSE to obtain the prediction error value of the reconstructed image block corresponding to a certain posterior candidate motion vector.
已重建图像块的N2个后验运动矢量可以是指上述N4个后验候选运动矢量;也可以是指上述N4个后验候选运动矢量中的部分运动矢量,例如上述N4个后验候选运动矢量中选出的多个指定的运动矢量。The N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block may refer to the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors; it may also refer to a partial motion vector in the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors, such as the above-mentioned N4 a posteriori candidate motion vectors selected from multiple specified motion vectors.
相应的,已重建图像块的与N2个后验运动矢量对应的预测误差值的个数也是N2。Correspondingly, the number of prediction error values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block is also N2.
多个已重建图像块的全部后验运动矢量可以表示为一个N2×Q的二维矩阵,N2为后验运动矢量的个数,Q为已重建图像块的个数,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000012
k=0、1、…、Q-1,表示已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,其含义为k指示的已重建图像块的n指示的后验运动矢量。
All the posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be represented as a N2×Q two-dimensional matrix, where N2 is the number of posterior motion vectors, Q is the number of reconstructed image blocks, and the elements are expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000012
k=0, 1, . The n indicates the posterior motion vector.
多个已重建图像块的全部预测误差值也可以表示为一个N2×Q的二维矩阵,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000013
k=0、1、…、Q-1,表示已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,其含义为k指示的已重建图像块的n指示的后验运动矢量对应的预测误差值。
The total prediction error values of multiple reconstructed image blocks can also be expressed as an N2×Q two-dimensional matrix, where the elements are expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000013
k=0, 1, . The n indicates the prediction error value corresponding to the posterior motion vector.
步骤902、根据多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值。Step 902: Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block according to multiple a posteriori motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple prediction error values corresponding to the candidate motion vectors are checked.
本申请可以将多个已重建图像块的全部预测误差值和全部后验运动矢量,即上述两个N2×Q的二维矩阵输入经训练的神经网络,由该神经网络输出当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值。该神经网络可以参照上述训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The present application can input all prediction error values and all posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks, that is, the above two N2×Q two-dimensional matrices, into a trained neural network, and the neural network outputs multiple A priori candidate motion vectors and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a priori candidate motion vectors. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量可以表示为一个N1×S的二维矩阵,N1为当前块的先验候选运动矢量的个数,S为当前块包含的基本单元图像块或像素的个数,若当前块没有被进一步划分,则S=1。矩阵中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000014
l=0、1、…、S-1,表示基本单元图像块或像素的索引,n=0、1、…、N1-1,表示先验候选运动矢量的索引,其含义为l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的n指示的先验候选运动矢量。
Multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block can be represented as a N1×S two-dimensional matrix, where N1 is the number of prior candidate motion vectors of the current block, and S is the number of basic unit image blocks or pixels contained in the current block number, if the current block is not further divided, then S=1. The elements in the matrix are represented as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000014
l=0, 1, . The prior candidate motion vector indicated by n of the unit image block or pixel.
当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值也可以表示为一个N1×S的二维矩阵。矩阵中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000015
l=0、1、…、S-1,表示基本单元图像块或像素的索 引,n=0、1、…、N1-1,表示先验候选运动矢量的索引,其含义为l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的n指示的先验候选运动矢量成为该基本单元图像块或像素的最优运动矢量的概率。
Multiple prediction error values of the current block corresponding to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors can also be represented as an N1×S two-dimensional matrix. The elements in the matrix are represented as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000015
l=0, 1, . The probability that the a priori candidate motion vector indicated by n of a unit image block or pixel becomes the optimal motion vector for this basic unit image block or pixel.
可选的,在l不变的情况下,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000016
即l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的与N1个先验候选运动矢量对应的N1个概率值之和为1。或者,也可以将
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000017
使用整型化的方式表达,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000018
256与
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000019
的整数值的二进制比特数相关,其表示
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000020
的整数值采用8比特表示,因此
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000021
也可以等于128或512等。
Optional, with l unchanged,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000016
That is, the sum of N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l is 1. Alternatively, you can also
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000017
Using integer expression, you can get
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000018
256 with
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000019
The integer value associated with the number of binary bits, which represents
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000020
The integer value of is represented in 8 bits, so
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000021
It can also be equal to 128 or 512 etc.
步骤903、根据当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,得到与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子。Step 903: Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple prediction error values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子也可以表示为一个N1×S的二维矩阵。矩阵中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000022
l=0、1、…、S-1,表示基本单元图像块或像素的索引,n=0、1、…、N1-1,表示先验候选运动矢量的索引,其含义为l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的n指示的先验候选运动矢量的权重因子。
Multiple weighting factors corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block can also be represented as an N1×S two-dimensional matrix. The elements in the matrix are represented as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000022
l=0, 1, . Weighting factor for the prior candidate motion vector indicated by n of the unit image block or pixel.
若当前块中l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的与N1个先验候选运动矢量对应的N1个概率值进行了归一化处理,即
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000023
则可以将该N1个概率值作为与N1个先验候选运动矢量对应的N1个权重因子,例如
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000024
若当前块中l指示的基本单元图像块或像素的与N1个先验候选运动矢量对应的N1个概率值没有进行归一化处理,则可以先对该N1个概率值进行归一化处理,然后将该N1个概率值的归一化值作为与N1个先验候选运动矢量对应的N1个权重因子。因此,在l不变的情况下,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000025
If the N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l in the current block are normalized, that is,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000023
Then the N1 probability values can be used as the N1 weighting factors corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors, for example
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000024
If the N1 probability values corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors of the basic unit image block or pixel indicated by l in the current block are not normalized, the N1 probability values may be normalized first, The normalized values of the N1 probability values are then used as N1 weighting factors corresponding to the N1 a priori candidate motion vectors. Therefore, with l unchanged,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000025
步骤904、根据多个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到多个预测值。Step 904: Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
以某一个先验候选运动矢量为例进行说明,该先验候选运动矢量是多个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个,其他先验候选运动矢量均可参照该方法。A certain prior candidate motion vector is taken as an example for description. The prior candidate motion vector is any one of a plurality of prior candidate motion vectors, and other prior candidate motion vectors may refer to this method.
按照先验候选运动矢量执行运动补偿得到当前块的一个预测值,因此N1个先验候选运动矢量可以得到N1个预测值。A prediction value of the current block is obtained by performing motion compensation according to the prior candidate motion vector, so N1 prediction values can be obtained from N1 prior candidate motion vectors.
当前块的多个预测值可以表示为一个BH×WH×S的三维矩阵,BH×WH表示当前块包含的基本单元图像块的尺寸,S为当前块包含的基本单元图像块或像素的个数,若当前块没有被进一步划分,则S=1。矩阵中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000026
l=0、1、…、S-1,表示基本单元图像块或像素的索引,n=0、1、…、N1-1,表示先验候选运动矢量的索引,其含义为l指示的基本单元图像块中的第i行、第j列的像素,n指示的先验候选运动矢量对应的预测值。
Multiple predicted values of the current block can be expressed as a BH×WH×S three-dimensional matrix, where BH×WH represents the size of the basic unit image blocks contained in the current block, and S is the number of basic unit image blocks or pixels contained in the current block , if the current block is not further divided, then S=1. The elements in the matrix are represented as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000026
l=0, 1, . The pixel in the i-th row and the j-th column in the unit image block, the predicted value corresponding to the prior candidate motion vector indicated by n.
步骤905、根据多个权重因子和多个预测值加权求和得到当前块的预测值。Step 905: Obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of the multiple weighting factors and the multiple predicted values.
将对应于同一个先验候选运动矢量的权重因子和预测值相乘,再将对应于多个先验候选运动矢量的多个乘积相加得到当前块的预测值。当前块中,l指示的基本单元图像块中的第i行、第j列的像素的预测值可以表示为:The predicted value of the current block is obtained by multiplying the weight factor corresponding to the same prior candidate motion vector and the predicted value, and then adding up multiple products corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors. In the current block, the predicted value of the pixel in the i-th row and the j-th column in the basic unit image block indicated by l can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000027
实施例二Embodiment 2
本实施例中,根据周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,确定当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验 候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。In this embodiment, multiple a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block are determined according to multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area. and multiple probability values corresponding to multiple a priori candidate motion vectors.
图11为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程1100的流程图。过程1100可由视频编码器20或视频解码器30执行,具体的,可以由视频编码器20或视频解码器30的帧间预测单元244、344来执行。过程1100描述为一系列的步骤或操作,应当理解的是,过程1100可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生,不限于图11所示的执行顺序。假设具有多个图像帧的视频数据流正在使用视频编码器或者视频解码器,执行包括如下步骤的过程1100来对图像或图像块进行帧间预测。过程1100可以包括:FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a process 1100 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application. Process 1100 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 . Process 1100 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 1100 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 11 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 1100 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block. Process 1100 may include:
步骤1101、获取周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Step 1101: Acquire a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors and a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors for each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
本实施例的步骤1101与上述实施例一的步骤901不同,区别在于:与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值变为与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。 Step 1101 of this embodiment is different from step 901 of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors.
以下以某个已重建图像块为例进行说明,该已重建图像块可以是周边区域中的多个已重建图像块中的任意一个,其他已重建图像块均可参照该方法获取多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。The following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example. The reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area. Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain multiple posteriors. A motion vector and a plurality of probability values corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors.
已重建图像块的N2个后验运动矢量可以参照上述步骤901中的方法获取,此处不再赘述。The N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by referring to the method in the above step 901, and details are not repeated here.
已重建图像块的与N2个后验运动矢量对应的N2个概率值可以有以下两种获取方法:The N2 probability values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
一种是根据实施例一获取到的已重建图像块的N2个预测误差值获取已重建图像块的N2个概率值。One is to obtain N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first embodiment.
已重建图像块的N2个预测误差值对应多个已重建图像块的全部预测误差值中的一个N2维向量,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000028
k1为已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,可以根据已重建图像块的N2个预测误差值计算得到已重建图像块的N2个概率值。已重建图像块的N2个概率值也可以表示为一个N2维向量,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000029
k1为已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,其含义为k1指示的已重建图像块的n指示的后验运动矢量成为该已重建图像块的最优运动矢量的概率。
The N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks correspond to an N2-dimensional vector of all the prediction error values of the reconstructed image blocks, and the elements of which are expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000028
k1 is the index of the reconstructed image block, n=0, 1, . probability value. The N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block can also be represented as an N2-dimensional vector, where the elements are represented as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000029
k1 is the index of the reconstructed image block, n=0, 1, . Probability of the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
可选的,可以使用下述归一化指数函数将
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000030
转换为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000031
Optionally, the following normalized exponential function can be used to
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000030
convert to
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000032
又例如,可以使用线性归一化方法将
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000033
转换为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000034
For another example, the linear normalization method can be used to
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000033
convert to
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000034
因此,在k不变的情况下,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000035
Therefore, with k constant,
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000035
另一种是将已重建图像块的重建值和与N2个后验运动矢量对应的N2个预测值输入经训练的神经网络得到已重建图像块的与N2个后验运动矢量对应的N2个概率值。该神经网络可以参照上述训练引擎25的描述,此处不再赘述。The other is to input the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the N2 predicted values corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors into the trained neural network to obtain N2 probabilities corresponding to the N2 posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block value. For the neural network, reference may be made to the description of the training engine 25 above, which will not be repeated here.
已重建图像块的重建值可以在对已重建图像块的编码之后获取,已重建图像块的与N2个后验运动矢量对应的N2个预测值可以参照上述步骤901中的方法获取,此处不再赘述。The reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block can be obtained after encoding the reconstructed image block, and the N2 predicted values corresponding to the N2 a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block can be obtained by referring to the method in the above step 901. Repeat.
多个已重建图像块的全部后验运动矢量可以表示为一个N2×Q的二维矩阵,N2为后验运动矢量的个数,Q为已重建图像块的个数,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000036
k=0、1、…、Q- 1,表示已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,其含义为k指示的已重建图像块的n指示的后验运动矢量。
All the posterior motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks can be represented as a N2×Q two-dimensional matrix, where N2 is the number of posterior motion vectors, Q is the number of reconstructed image blocks, and the elements are expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000036
k=0, 1, . The n indicates the posterior motion vector.
多个已重建图像块的全部概率值也可以表示为一个N2×Q的二维矩阵,其中的元素表示为
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000037
k=0、1、…、Q-1,表示已重建图像块的索引,n=0、1、…、N2-1,表示后验运动矢量的索引,其含义为k指示的已重建图像块的n指示的后验运动矢量成为该已重建图像块的最优运动矢量的概率。
All probability values of multiple reconstructed image blocks can also be expressed as a N2×Q two-dimensional matrix, where the elements are expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021120640-appb-000037
k=0, 1, . The probability that the posterior motion vector indicated by n becomes the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
步骤1102、根据多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Step 1102: Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors and multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block according to multiple posterior motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. Multiple probability values corresponding to candidate motion vectors.
本实施例的步骤1102与上述实施例一的步骤902不同,区别在于:输入神经网络的与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值变为与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值。 Step 1102 of this embodiment is different from step 902 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the difference is that the multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors input to the neural network become multiple multiple posterior motion vectors corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors. probability value.
步骤1103、根据当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,得到与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子。Step 1103: Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
步骤1104、根据多个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到多个预测值。Step 1104: Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
步骤1105、根据多个权重因子和多个预测值加权求和得到当前块的预测值。Step 1105: Obtain the prediction value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple prediction values.
本实施例的步骤1103-1105可参照实施例一的步骤903-905,此处不再赘述。For steps 1103-1105 in this embodiment, reference may be made to steps 903-905 in Embodiment 1, and details are not repeated here.
实施例三Embodiment 3
本实施例中,根据周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,确定当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。In this embodiment, according to the respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area, multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors are determined.
图12为本申请实施例的帧间预测方法的过程1200的流程图。过程1200可由视频编码器20或视频解码器30执行,具体的,可以由视频编码器20或视频解码器30的帧间预测单元244、344来执行。过程1200描述为一系列的步骤或操作,应当理解的是,过程1200可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生,不限于图12所示的执行顺序。假设具有多个图像帧的视频数据流正在使用视频编码器或者视频解码器,执行包括如下步骤的过程1200来对图像或图像块进行帧间预测。过程1200可以包括:FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a process 1200 of an inter-frame prediction method according to an embodiment of the present application. Process 1200 may be performed by video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 , and in particular, may be performed by inter prediction units 244 , 344 of video encoder 20 or video decoder 30 . Process 1200 is described as a series of steps or operations, and it should be understood that process 1200 may be performed in various orders and/or concurrently, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 12 . Assuming that a video data stream with multiple image frames is using a video encoder or a video decoder, a process 1200 comprising the following steps is performed to inter-predict an image or image block. Process 1200 may include:
步骤1201、获取周边区域中的多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量。Step 1201: Obtain the respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area.
本实施例的步骤1201与上述实施例一的步骤901不同,区别在于:多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值变为最优运动矢量。 Step 1201 of this embodiment is different from step 901 of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the multiple posterior motion vectors and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become optimal motion vectors.
以下以某个已重建图像块为例进行说明,该已重建图像块可以是周边区域中的多个已重建图像块中的任意一个,其他已重建图像块均可参照该方法获取最优运动矢量。The following description takes a reconstructed image block as an example. The reconstructed image block can be any one of multiple reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area. Other reconstructed image blocks can refer to this method to obtain the optimal motion vector. .
已重建图像块的最优运动矢量可以有以下两种获取方法:The optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block can be obtained in the following two ways:
一种是根据实施例一获取到的已重建图像块的N2个预测误差值获取已重建图像块的最优运动矢量,即将已重建图像块的N2个预测误差值中的最小预测误差值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。One is to obtain the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the first embodiment, that is, the minimum prediction error value corresponding to the N2 prediction error values of the reconstructed image block. The posterior motion vector serves as the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
另一种是根据实施例二获取到的已重建图像块的N2个概率值获取已重建图像块的最优运动矢量,即将已重建图像块的N2个概率值中的最大概率值对应的后验运动矢量作为已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。The other is to obtain the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block according to the N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block obtained in the second embodiment, that is, the posterior corresponding to the largest probability value among the N2 probability values of the reconstructed image block The motion vector serves as the optimal motion vector for the reconstructed image block.
步骤1202、根据多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,得到当前块的多个先验候选运动矢量以及与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值。Step 1202: Obtain multiple prior candidate motion vectors of the current block and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to the respective optimal motion vectors of the multiple reconstructed image blocks.
本实施例的步骤1202与上述实施例一的步骤902不同,区别在于:输入神经网络的多个后验运动矢量以及与多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值变为多个已重建图像块的最优运动矢量。 Step 1202 of this embodiment is different from step 902 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the difference is that the multiple posterior motion vectors input to the neural network and multiple prediction error values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors become multiple reconstructed The optimal motion vector for the image block.
步骤1203、根据当前块的与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个概率值,得到与多个先验候选运动矢量对应的多个权重因子。Step 1203: Obtain multiple weighting factors corresponding to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors according to multiple probability values of the current block corresponding to multiple prior candidate motion vectors.
步骤1204、根据多个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到多个预测值。Step 1204: Perform motion compensation respectively according to the multiple prior candidate motion vectors to obtain multiple predicted values.
步骤1205、根据多个权重因子和多个预测值加权求和得到当前块的预测值。Step 1205: Obtain the predicted value of the current block according to the weighted summation of multiple weighting factors and multiple predicted values.
本实施例的步骤1203-1205可参照实施例一的步骤903-905,此处不再赘述。For steps 1203-1205 in this embodiment, reference may be made to steps 903-905 in the first embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
图13为本申请实施例的帧间预测装置1300的结构示意图。该帧间预测装置1300包括:运动估计单元1301和帧间预测处理单元1302,其中,运动估计单元1301用于获取当前块的周边区域中的P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量,所述周边区域包括所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域;帧间预测处理单元1302用于根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;根据与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个概率值,得到与所述M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个权重因子;M、P和Q为正整数,M小于或等于Q;根据所述M个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到M个预测值;根据所述M个预测值和对应的所述M个权重因子加权求和得到所述当前块的预测值。在一种示例下,包括运动估计单元1301和帧间预测处理单元1302的帧间预测装置1300可以对应于图2中的帧间预测单元244,或者对应于图3中的帧间预测单元344。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application. The inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 includes: a motion estimation unit 1301 and an inter-frame prediction processing unit 1302, wherein the motion estimation unit 1301 is configured to obtain the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block. The region includes the spatial neighborhood and/or temporal neighborhood of the current block; the inter prediction processing unit 1302 is configured to obtain Q a priori candidate motions of the current block according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks vector and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors; according to the M probability values corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors, M corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors are obtained Weight factor; M, P, and Q are positive integers, and M is less than or equal to Q; respectively perform motion compensation according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors to obtain M predicted values; according to the M predicted values and the corresponding The M weighting factors are weighted and summed to obtain the predicted value of the current block. In one example, the inter prediction apparatus 1300 including the motion estimation unit 1301 and the inter prediction processing unit 1302 may correspond to the inter prediction unit 244 in FIG. 2 , or to the inter prediction unit 344 in FIG. 3 .
在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。本申请实施例公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件编码处理器执行完成,或者用编码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware coding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the coding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
上述各实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。The memory mentioned in the above embodiments may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art can realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (20)

  1. 一种帧间预测方法,其特征在于,包括:An inter-frame prediction method, comprising:
    获取当前块的周边区域中的P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量,所述周边区域包括所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域;obtaining the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks in the surrounding area of the current block, the surrounding area including the spatial neighborhood and/or the temporal neighborhood of the current block;
    根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;Obtaining Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks;
    根据与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个概率值,得到与所述M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个权重因子;M、P和Q为正整数,M小于或等于Q;According to the M probability values corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors, M weighting factors corresponding to the M prior candidate motion vectors are obtained; M, P and Q are positive integers, and M is less than or equal to Q;
    根据所述M个先验候选运动矢量分别执行运动补偿得到M个预测值;Performing motion compensation respectively according to the M a priori candidate motion vectors to obtain M predicted values;
    根据所述M个预测值和对应的所述M个权重因子加权求和得到所述当前块的预测值。The predicted value of the current block is obtained by weighted summation of the M predicted values and the corresponding M weighting factors.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein, according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and the Q a priori candidate motion vectors and the Q a priori candidates are obtained. Q probability values corresponding to the motion vector, including:
    将所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量输入经训练的神经网络得到所述Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值。The respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks are input into the trained neural network to obtain the Q prior candidate motion vectors and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据与M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个概率值,得到与所述M个先验候选运动矢量对应的M个权重因子,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the M weighting factors corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors are obtained according to the M probability values corresponding to the M a priori candidate motion vectors ,include:
    当所述M个概率值之和为1时,将与第一先验候选运动矢量对应的所述概率值作为与所述第一先验候选运动矢量对应的所述权重因子;或者,When the sum of the M probability values is 1, the probability value corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector is used as the weighting factor corresponding to the first prior candidate motion vector; or,
    当所述M个概率值之和不为1时,对所述M个概率值进行归一化处理;将与所述第一先验候选运动矢量对应的所述概率值的归一化值作为与所述第一先验候选运动矢量对应的所述权重因子;When the sum of the M probability values is not 1, normalize the M probability values; take the normalized value of the probability values corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector as the weighting factor corresponding to the first a priori candidate motion vector;
    其中,所述第一先验候选运动矢量是所述M个先验候选运动矢量中的任意一个。Wherein, the first a priori candidate motion vector is any one of the M a priori candidate motion vectors.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,M等于Q,所述M个概率值为所述Q个概率值。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein M is equal to Q, and the M probability values are the Q probability values.
  5. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,M小于Q,所述M个概率值均大于所述Q个概率值中除所述M个概率值外的其他概率值。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein M is smaller than Q, and the M probability values are all greater than other probability values except the M probability values among the Q probability values .
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, characterized in that, according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and the The Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors, including:
    将所述P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值输入经训练的神经网络,得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;已重建图像块的所述多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值是根据所述已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的,所述已重建图像块是所述P个已重建图像块中的任意一个。Inputting multiple posterior motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks and multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors into the trained neural network to obtain Q priors of the current block candidate motion vectors and Q probability values corresponding to the Q a priori candidate motion vectors; the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block and the plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors is determined according to the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the prediction values corresponding to multiple a posteriori candidate motion vectors, where the reconstructed image block is any one of the P reconstructed image blocks.
  7. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述P个已重建图 像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, characterized in that, according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and the The Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors, including:
    将所述P个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值输入经训练的神经网络,得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;已重建图像块的所述多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值是根据所述已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的,所述已重建图像块是所述P个已重建图像块中的任意一个。A plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the P reconstructed image blocks and a plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors are input into the trained neural network to obtain the Q prior motion vectors of the current block. a priori candidate motion vector and Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors; the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block and multiple predictions corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors The error value is determined according to the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the predicted value corresponding to a plurality of a posteriori candidate motion vectors, where the reconstructed image block is any one of the P reconstructed image blocks.
  8. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述P个已重建图像块各自的运动矢量得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, characterized in that, according to the respective motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks, the Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and the The Q probability values corresponding to the Q prior candidate motion vectors, including:
    将所述P个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量输入经训练的神经网络,得到所述当前块的Q个先验候选运动矢量以及与所述Q个先验候选运动矢量对应的Q个概率值;已重建图像块的所述最优运动矢量是所述已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量中概率值最大或预测误差值最小的后验运动矢量,所述已重建图像块是所述多个已重建图像块中的任意一个;其中,Input the respective optimal motion vectors of the P reconstructed image blocks into the trained neural network to obtain Q a priori candidate motion vectors of the current block and Q a priori candidate motion vectors corresponding to the Q a priori candidate motion vectors probability value; the optimal motion vector of the reconstructed image block is the posterior motion vector with the largest probability value or the smallest prediction error value among the multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block, and the reconstructed image block is any one of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks; wherein,
    所述已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量对应多个概率值,所述多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的所述多个概率值是根据所述已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的;或者,The multiple posterior motion vectors of the reconstructed image block correspond to multiple probability values, and the multiple posterior motion vectors and the multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors are based on the multiple posterior motion vectors. The reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the predicted value corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors are determined; or,
    所述已重建图像块的多个后验运动矢量对应多个预测误差值,所述多个后验运动矢量以及与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的所述多个预测误差值是根据所述已重建图像块的重建值和多个后验候选运动矢量对应的预测值确定的。A plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of the reconstructed image block correspond to a plurality of prediction error values, and the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors and the plurality of prediction error values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors are based on the It is determined by the reconstructed value of the reconstructed image block and the predicted value corresponding to the multiple posterior candidate motion vectors.
  9. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 6, further comprising:
    获取训练数据集合,其中所述训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;Acquire a training data set, wherein the training data set includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks, and the plurality of posterior motion vectors. multiple probability values corresponding to the posterior motion vector, multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, and the multiple reconstructed image blocks are the current block image patches in the spatial and/or temporal neighborhood of ;
    根据所述训练数据集合训练得到所述神经网络。The neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
  10. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 7, further comprising:
    获取训练数据集合,其中所述训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个预测误差值,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;Acquire a training data set, wherein the training data set includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes a plurality of a posteriori motion vectors of each of the plurality of reconstructed image blocks, and the plurality of posterior motion vectors. multiple prediction error values corresponding to the posterior motion vector, multiple posterior motion vectors of the current block, multiple probability values corresponding to the multiple posterior motion vectors, and the multiple reconstructed image blocks are the current an image block in the spatial and/or temporal neighborhood of the block;
    根据所述训练数据集合训练得到所述神经网络。The neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
  11. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 8, further comprising:
    获取训练数据集合,其中所述训练数据集合包括多组图像块的信息,其中每组图像块的信息包括多个已重建图像块各自的最优运动矢量,以及当前块的多个后验运动矢量、与所述多个后验运动矢量对应的多个概率值,所述多个已重建图像块是所述当前块的空间邻域和/或时间邻域中的图像块;Obtaining a training data set, wherein the training data set includes information of multiple groups of image blocks, wherein the information of each group of image blocks includes respective optimal motion vectors of multiple reconstructed image blocks, and multiple posteriors of the current block a motion vector, a plurality of probability values corresponding to the plurality of a posteriori motion vectors, the plurality of reconstructed image blocks being image blocks in a spatial neighborhood and/or a temporal neighborhood of the current block;
    根据所述训练数据集合训练得到所述神经网络。The neural network is obtained by training according to the training data set.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述神经网络至少包括卷积层和激活层。The method according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the neural network at least includes a convolution layer and an activation layer.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述卷积层的卷积核的深度为2、3、4、5、6、16、24、32、48、64或者128;所述卷积层中的卷积核的尺寸为1×1、3×3、5×5或者7×7。The method according to claim 12, wherein the depth of the convolution kernel of the convolution layer is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64 or 128; The size of the convolution kernels in the buildup layer is 1×1, 3×3, 5×5, or 7×7.
  14. 根据权利要求9-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述神经网络包括卷积神经网络CNN、深度神经网络DNN或者循环神经网络RNN。The method according to any one of claims 9-13, wherein the neural network comprises a convolutional neural network CNN, a deep neural network DNN or a recurrent neural network RNN.
  15. 一种编码器,其特征在于,包括处理电路,用于执行权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。An encoder, characterized by comprising a processing circuit for executing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
  16. 一种解码器,其特征在于,包括处理电路,用于执行权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A decoder, characterized by comprising a processing circuit for executing the method of any one of claims 1 to 14.
  17. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括程序代码,当其在计算机或处理器上执行时,用于执行权利要求任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that it includes program code, which, when executed on a computer or processor, is used to perform the method of any one of the claims.
  18. 一种编码器,其特征在于,包括:A kind of encoder, is characterized in that, comprises:
    一个或多个处理器;one or more processors;
    非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,耦合到所述处理器并存储由所述处理器执行的程序,其中所述程序在由所述处理器执行时,使得所述解码器执行权利要求任一项所述的方法。A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processor and storing a program executed by the processor, wherein the program, when executed by the processor, causes the decoder to perform any of the claims the method described.
  19. 一种解码器,其特征在于,包括:A decoder, characterized in that it includes:
    一个或多个处理器;one or more processors;
    非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,耦合到所述处理器并存储由所述处理器执行的程序,其中所述程序在由所述处理器执行时,使得所述编码器执行权利要求任一项所述的方法。A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium coupled to the processor and storing a program executed by the processor, wherein the program, when executed by the processor, causes the encoder to perform any of the claims the method described.
  20. 一种非瞬时性计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括程序代码,当其由计算机设备执行时,用于执行权利要求任一项所述的方法。A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it includes program code, which, when executed by a computer device, is used to perform the method of any one of the claims.
PCT/CN2021/120640 2020-09-28 2021-09-26 Inter-frame prediction method and apparatus WO2022063265A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202011043942.X 2020-09-28
CN202011043942.XA CN114286100A (en) 2020-09-28 2020-09-28 Inter-frame prediction method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022063265A1 true WO2022063265A1 (en) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80844989

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/120640 WO2022063265A1 (en) 2020-09-28 2021-09-26 Inter-frame prediction method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114286100A (en)
WO (1) WO2022063265A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114611637A (en) * 2022-05-11 2022-06-10 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and readable storage medium
CN114842424A (en) * 2022-06-07 2022-08-02 北京拙河科技有限公司 Intelligent security image identification method and device based on motion compensation

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114898577B (en) * 2022-07-13 2022-09-20 环球数科集团有限公司 Road intelligent management system and method for peak road management

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103124344A (en) * 2011-11-18 2013-05-29 江南大学 Motion estimation method
CN109672886A (en) * 2019-01-11 2019-04-23 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of picture frame prediction technique, device and head show equipment
CN110062239A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-07-26 杭州师范大学 A kind of reference frame selecting method and device for Video coding
WO2019183906A1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2019-10-03 华为技术有限公司 Inter-frame prediction method and device
CN110506422A (en) * 2017-03-02 2019-11-26 交互数字Vc控股公司 One kind being used for picture coding and decoded method and apparatus
WO2020056798A1 (en) * 2018-09-21 2020-03-26 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for video encoding and decoding
CN111200735A (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-05-26 华为技术有限公司 Inter-frame prediction method and device

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103124344A (en) * 2011-11-18 2013-05-29 江南大学 Motion estimation method
CN110506422A (en) * 2017-03-02 2019-11-26 交互数字Vc控股公司 One kind being used for picture coding and decoded method and apparatus
WO2019183906A1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2019-10-03 华为技术有限公司 Inter-frame prediction method and device
WO2020056798A1 (en) * 2018-09-21 2020-03-26 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for video encoding and decoding
CN111200735A (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-05-26 华为技术有限公司 Inter-frame prediction method and device
CN109672886A (en) * 2019-01-11 2019-04-23 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of picture frame prediction technique, device and head show equipment
CN110062239A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-07-26 杭州师范大学 A kind of reference frame selecting method and device for Video coding

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114611637A (en) * 2022-05-11 2022-06-10 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and readable storage medium
CN114611637B (en) * 2022-05-11 2022-08-05 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and readable storage medium
CN114842424A (en) * 2022-06-07 2022-08-02 北京拙河科技有限公司 Intelligent security image identification method and device based on motion compensation
CN114842424B (en) * 2022-06-07 2023-01-24 北京拙河科技有限公司 Intelligent security image identification method and device based on motion compensation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114286100A (en) 2022-04-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022068716A1 (en) Entropy encoding/decoding method and device
CN115695785B (en) Image prediction method and device
WO2022063265A1 (en) Inter-frame prediction method and apparatus
JP7279154B2 (en) Motion vector prediction method and apparatus based on affine motion model
CN113196748B (en) Intra-frame prediction method and related device
WO2020228560A1 (en) Method and device for obtaining a list of candidate motion vectors, and codec
CN114125446A (en) Image encoding method, decoding method and device
WO2021008524A1 (en) Image encoding method and device, image decoding method and device, and storage medium
WO2022111233A1 (en) Intra prediction mode coding method, and apparatus
JP2023179684A (en) Picture prediction method and device, and computer readable storage medium
US20230388490A1 (en) Encoding method, decoding method, and device
US20230239500A1 (en) Intra Prediction Method and Apparatus
WO2020259567A1 (en) Video encoder, video decoder and corresponding method
CN114915783A (en) Encoding method and apparatus
CN115604485A (en) Video image decoding method and device
WO2023011420A1 (en) Encoding method and apparatus, and decoding method and apparatus
WO2023020320A1 (en) Entropy encoding and decoding method and device
CN116137659A (en) Inter-coded block partitioning method and apparatus
CN110876061B (en) Chroma block prediction method and device
WO2024012249A1 (en) Method and apparatus for coding image including text, and method and apparatus for decoding image including text
RU2786022C1 (en) Device and method for limitations of block level depending on mode and size
EP4128782A1 (en) Motion compensation with a sparse optical flow representation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21871634

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21871634

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1